App A

This course material, and the content provided herein, is intended exclusively for internal Chevron use by internal
course participants and is not to be shared outside the Company.

Further, these course materials are not to be copied, distributed, or otherwise used for any internal or external purpose other than their utilization as a learning resource for this particular course.
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Company Confidential.
Handbook
Drilling | Completion |Workover
Well Control
Version 1.3
1
This course material, and the content provided herein, is intended exclusively for internal Chevron use by internal course participants and is not to be shared outside the Company.
Version 1.3
Tenet 7
regulations.”
Chevron Well Control Handbook

1 PREPARATION
“Always comply with all applicable rules and
1 -6 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 1 - Preparation
Introduction
Well Control Goals

Chevron’s recommended well control practices are
DPP
based on principles that guarantee containment.

Chevron operational well control goals, established CP
principally to protect people and the environment are as
follows (listed in decreasing priority):
• Maintain primary hydrostatic control of the well at all
times during well operations.
• Efficiently use secondary well control options
whenever primary control of the well is lost. By
emphasizing the need for the earliest practical
detection of a kick, followed by rapid well shut-in, the
probability of successfully controlling a kick using
standard, appropriate procedures is enhanced. Drillstring
Float
• Restore primary control of the well, using acceptable
well control methods, to enhance safety and Kick
operational performance objectives (in that order of Influx
priority). Based on specific local conditions an SBU
level MOC can be put in place to select an
appropriate kill technique such as the Wait & Weight
Method, bullheading, etc.
The procedures and methods detailed in this handbook can be referenced and
used to help implement, maintain, and restore well control for all operations and
rig-work employed by Chevron.
Chevron rig-work and operations include drilling, completions and workovers, and
well intervention work. Rig types used to achieve the objectives of each
operational plan include:
• Land drilling rigs
• Offshore jack-ups and platform rigs (surface BOP)
• Offshore semis and drillships (subsea BOP)
• Pulling units, hydraulic workover rigs, snubbing units, wireline/slick line units
and coiled tubing units
Each application of this equipment requires specific operational plans but all
require sound well control practices and procedures.
Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 -7 2

Introduction - continued
Drilling Program
• Casing Depths
• MW vs Pore psi
• Bit & Hydraulics
Completion Plan
• Cleanout Run
• Perforating Details
• Frac / Gravel Pac
Common Goal: • Run Completion Assy
Well Control • Well Testing
• ND BOP, NU Tree
Workover Work
• Kill Well
• ND Tree, NU BOP
• Pull Completion Tubing
• Run Workstring
• Conduct WO Work
• ND BOP, NU Tree

D&C GTS Well Control Requirements (excerpts)

Blowout Contingency Plan

There shall be an updated Blowout Contingency Plan (BCP) in
place when conducting D&C activities.
Emergency Evacuation Procedures

Each rig shall have an emergency evacuation procedure for well
designs that require the use of a diverter system or riser-less
drilling.
• Rigs equipped with a diverter should have a documented rig-
specific diverting procedure.
• The procedure shall clearly define roles and responsibilities for
rig crew involved in the diverting procedure.
Drill String Float

There shall be at least one solid float installed in drilling BHAs
when conducting drilling activities. If possible, a solid float should
be installed in applicable work strings as well.
Minimum Fluid Inventories

Each drilling, completion, or workover operation should establish
and maintain sufficient inventories of:
Drilling Fluids
Barite – bulk and /or sack materials
Additives as per the type of drilling fluid in use.
LCM
Workover / Completion Brines
Liquid Brine of sufficient density
Spike Fluids
Fluid loss control additives
Cement
Offshore rigs should establish and maintain minimum inventory.
Subsea Operations
• Choke line friction pressures should be taken any time there is
a change in mud weight or mud properties.
• Choke and kill lines should be flushed regularly and left filled
with current mud weight. These lines should be circulated prior
to BPUTS during well control operations.


To mitigate risk associated with potential well control events, Chevron has
adopted the following Well Control Requirements (taken from the Global
Standard).
1. Reporting protocol for well control event shall include a discussion, before
the well control operations commence, that covers at least the following:
o Kill method
o Kill weight mud
o Use of safety factors in excess of the initial circulating
pressure
o Kill pump rate
o Maximum initial shut-in casing pressure
o Kick tolerance
o Stabilized shut-in casing pressure
2. For subsea stack operations, each rig shall have defined requirements for
pipe hang-off. These requirements shall include the following, at a minimum:
• Criteria used to make the determination to hang-off.
• Method to determine the set down weight on the hang-off rams
and/or the tension required on the drillpipe at the stack.
• Action to take with the annular after hang-off.
• Clear understanding of capacities of the variable-bore rams as hang-
off rams.
• Location and justification of the shear blind rams in the stack.
3. Each rig shall have a defined process to determine if and/or when pipe
movement will be allowed if the annular is used for well control.
4. Each rig shall define which BOP element is to be used during the well
kill procedure.
• The uppermost BOP element should be used during initial shut-in
conditions unless current operations dictate otherwise.
• The uppermost BOP element is usually the annular, which allows for
location of tool joints as well as movement of pipe if required.
Note: The lowermost set of pipe rams should be defined as
“master/safety pipe rams.”
5. Communication and documentation protocols shall be defined to authorize
the use of an off-bottom kill procedure. At a minimum, management of
change (MOC) with risk and uncertainty management documentation should
be completed with approval from BU D&C management.
Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 5

1 10

6. A Chevron drill/wellsite manager (DSM/WSM), with a valid Chevron Well

Control Certificate, shall supervise the overall well kill operation at the work
site. The Chevron DSM/WSM that oversees the well kill operation should be
the most senior and / or lead DSM/WSM.
7. Bridging document for each rig or workover unit shall identify the primary
choke operator, verify the choke operator’s competency, and explain the
process for confirming choke operator competency.
8. To prepare for and respond to potential well control situations, specific well
control procedures shall be defined and developed for non-routine
operations that require special consideration. Examples include the following:
• Gravel pack screens or perforated liners across the BOP stack and
within the well.
• Tubing with control lines across the BOP stack.
• BOP equipment failure that requires remotely operated vehicle
intervention to operate stack functions and the like.
• Multi-string completions.
9. For rigs equipped with shear rams and blind shear rams, the BU shall ensure
that rig teams document well control procedures and operations when non-
shearable tubulars are across the stack. These procedures shall include
specific shearing instructions for any tubular, posting of specific shearing
instructions at the driller’s station, and a shear matrix (tubular shearing table)
that identifies non-shearable tubulars.
10. Well control procedures shall be defined and developed for special
operations, such as the following:
• High-pressure/high-temperature conditions
• Managed pressure drilling
• Dual gradient drilling
• Closed hole circulating drilling
• Mud cap drilling
• Casing drilling
• Horizontal drilling
• Slim hole drilling
• Steam boiling liquid expanding vapor explosion (BLEVE)
considerations
• Air blows
• Air drilling
• Shallow Hazards

1 11
Barriers (D&C Global Technical Standard: Well Barrier Design)

In a well design, a barrier is a component or practice that contributes to total

system reliability by preventing formation fluid or gas flow.
The three classifications of barriers are:

1. Hydrostatic
2. Cement
3. Mechanical
Hydrostatic Barrier
A hydrostatic barrier is achieved through the effect of hydrostatic pressure
from a column of fluid.
Hydrostatic Barrier Examples:

• Drilling Mud
• Completion Brines
• Sea Water
• Oils
A static test is the primary means of Hydrostatic Barrier Verification. It is used

to verify that a fluid column has sufficient hydrostatic pressure to overcome
pore pressure.
Cement Barrier
A column of cement is defined as a barrier after it has reached its planned
minimum compressive strength.
Cement Barrier Verification

• Verification to prevent flow
o Positive pressure test
o Inflow test
• Verification of placement (inside the wellbore or casing annulus) is also

required. Placement of a cement plug may verified by set-down weight for
example.
Mechanical Barrier
A mechanical barrier is achieved through mechanical means. The barrier
elements may contain metal and/or elastomeric rubber or polymer.

1 12
Barriers - continued
Mechanical Barrier Examples:

• Blowout preventer (BOP) & production tree, & sub sea test tree (SSTT)
• Bridge plugs, cement retainers, crown plugs, tree caps
• Full opening safety valve (FOSV), top drive FOSV, IBOP

• Permanent packer with plug, storm packer, test packers
• Casing, tubing & liner hangers - with seal
• Back pressure valve (BPV) and two-way check valve
Barrier integrity shall be verified upon installation and at periodic intervals, as

required.
APPLICATION OF THE BARRIER STANDARD

Routine Operations
All Chevron D&C, Intervention, Environmental Management Company (EMC),
and Base Business (BB) case operations shall have a minimum of two
independent barriers available within or on a well to prevent uncontrolled flow
from the wellbore.
Long-term Suspension & Abandonment

Two barriers shall be in place (neither of which shall be hydrostatic).
Deepwater Recommendation – One of the two barriers should be a mechanical
barrier with a minimum of 100 ft MD of cement above it.
Non-routine Operations
During non-routine operations (operations where maintaining 2 barriers is not
possible or practical), proceeding with a single barrier for a finite duration is
permissible if supported by SOP and risk assessment.
If one of the required minimum barriers fails, forward operations

shall be suspended until the minimum number of required barriers
can be re-established.
Prior to commencing operations, a well diagram or table shall be

prepared that defines the barriers to prevent flow along each
potential flow path, for each stage of the well construction process.
 This shall include barriers put in place for short-term
suspension if the rig is to be moved off location for any reason.
 During operations, if any deviations occur from the original plan
or if the condition of the barrier changes, the well diagram or
table shall be updated to reflect current conditions.
Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 13

- 8
Training & Competency

All rig personnel having well control duties must be competent in

their ability to perform those duties. To ensure competency Chevron

requires:
Well Control Training

All CVX supervisory personnel must maintain a Chevron recognized well control
certification at the level of their job duties.
Well Assessments
All personnel will be regularly assessed to ensure competency is maintained.
Participation in Well Control Drills

Rig personnel must regularly participate in the following Drills:
Drills (D&C GTS: Well Control Requirements) Frequency (per crew)

Hole Monitoring While Drilling, Milling, or Once per week
Circulating
Shut-In Drill Once per week
Well Kill Drill Once per month
Choke Drill Once per month
Diverter Drill Once per month
Stripping Drill Once per quarter
Non-Shearable Drill Prior to event
Drill for Non-Routine Operations Once per operation

Emergency Disconnect Sequence Drill Once per month

- 9
Well Control Responsibilities

The following Contractor and Service Company personnel

assignments are for an offshore floating vessel. Similar
assignments and responsibilities should be available and posted

for any rig working for Chevron D&C.
Toolpusher
• Ensures that the crew is organized and prepared for killing the well.
• Liases with the Drill /Well Site Manager (DSM/WSM) throughout the well kill
operation.
• May operate the choke (or his designee).
Driller
• The Driller is responsible for monitoring the well at all times, identifying kick
indicators, and shutting-in the well quickly and safely.
• Once the well is shut-in, calls the Person-in-Charge.
• On floating rigs, calls the Subsea Engineer to the drill floor initially.
• Monitors key parameters (pressures, volumes and time) and designates a
crew member to record same during the kill operation.
• Operates the mud pump during the kill operation.
Assistant Driller / Derrickhand
• Lines up the mud gas separator and vacuum degasser.
• Lines up the mixing pumps and bulk barite system for weighting up the mud
and stands by for specific instructions from TP and Mud Engineer.
• Once pumping starts, keeps constant check on mud weight and pit volumes
and reports these to the Driller.
Floormen
• Follow instructions from Driller
Mud Engineer
• Reports to the pit room to check the AD/Derrickhand’s preparations and co-
ordinates the building and maintenance of the required mud system.
• Checks and confirms all volumes of mud and chemicals on board. Monitors
mud properties and return flow for any abnormalities.
• Checks and confirms calibration of mud balance.
Barge Supervisor / Captain
• Ensures that the bulk system is charged and ready for use.

1 15
Well Control Responsibilities - continued

• Stands-by in the control room or bridge in preparation for responding to an

emergency situation.
• Notifies the standby vessel (if available) to move into evacuation position.
• Ensures readiness of the evacuation equipment.
Crane Operator
• Ensures that doors and hatches are closed, where necessary.
• Assists mud mixing operations.
• Supervises Roustabouts
• Report to mud pits / sack room to assist the AD and Derrickhand.
Subsea Engineer
• Reports initially to the drill floor to check functions and operting pressures on
the BOP control panel. He/she must be present at the control panel in case of
equipment problems.
Mud Logging Engineers
• Report to the mud logging unit and continuously monitor the circlating and
drilling systems.
• Review all data and report any abnormalities to the DSM/WSM, Driller, and
Senior Toolpusher.
Cementer
• Ensures that the cement unit is tested and ready for operation.
• Ensures slurry formulation and additives are ready in case a cement plug is
required.
• Operates the cement unit, if requied, under the instruction of the Senior
Toolpusher.
Electrician / Mechanic
• Stanby for possible instructions.
Control Room Operator
• Ensures that rig stability is maintained and monitors safety systems (Gas
Alarms, etc.) during well control operations.
Radio Operator
• Logs all calls, telexes and faxes and keeps the lines open for the DSM/WSM,
OIM and any other personnel authorized by the OIM to use the
communications system.
• Assists the OIM and DSM/WSM in all matters of communication.

1 16
Basic Concepts: Wellbore Pressures

Hydrostatic Pressure
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
MW To calculate the total vertical depth (TVD):

10.8 ppg 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 ) × cos(𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖)
4000’
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 4000 + (10000 − 4000) × cos(40°)
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 = 4000 + 4596 = 8596′
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 0.052 × 10.8 × 8596 = 4828 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
6000’
4596 ‘
4828 psi
Displacement
TVD=8,596’ TMD=10,000’
500 psi
𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀 𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏𝐏
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
Gas 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
400’
2 ppg
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 500 + 0.052 × 2 × 400 + 0.052 × 10.8 × (8596 − 400)
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 ≅ 500 + 42 + 4603 = 5145 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
MW
6000’ 10.8 ppg 5145 psi
TMD=10,000’
TVD=8596’

1 17
U-Tube Concept
Drill String Annulus

SIDPP SICP
Original MW
(OMW)
ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
Well TVD
Formation Pressure
IMPORTANT RELATIONSHIPS (Static Wellbore)
1. 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = 0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂

2. 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 0.052 × (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖) × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 + 0.052 × ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 × 𝑊𝑊𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
3. 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 (assume no float in string)
4. 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
5. 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + ℎ𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 − 𝑊𝑊𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
6. With no trapped pressure on the well:
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
And: (Always Round Up to Next 0.1 ppg when calculating KMW)
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 + 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼(𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾)
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 +
0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇

1 18
Circulating System Friction Pressure

Standpipe pressure is the sum of the “friction”

pressures associated with circulating the drilling
fluid through the circulation path.

The system path consists of the surface lines and standpipe, top
drive components, drill string, bit, and then up the annulus and out
the flow line.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑+𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
The magnitude of the friction pressure is determined by:
• Geometry (Length and Flow Area)
• Fluid Properties (Density, Rheology)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀2
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹2 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹1 ×
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀1
• Flow Rate
2
𝑄𝑄2
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹2 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹1 ×
𝑄𝑄1
Pressure gauges read the hydrostatic pressure on top of the gauge and the friction
pressure downstream of the gauge location. When the total annular component
of friction pressure is converted to a MW term and added to the MW in the well it
is known as the Equivalent Circulating Density (ECD).
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 +
Example:
Total depth (straight hole) is 14,000 ft and the MW is 12.0 ppg. The annular
friction loss @ 120 spm while drilling ahead is 140 psi. What would the ECD be?
140
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 12.0 + = 12 + 0.19~ 12.2 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 14000
The following formula relates the circulating system friction pressures with the
surface choke back pressure and yields BHP used for circulating kill procedures.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐

Subsea

1 19
Slow Circulating Rates (SCRs)

Slow Circulating Rates (SCRs)

Standpipe (drill pipe) pressure is used

Standpipe
during well control operations that require
Pressure
circulation to verify correct bottom hole CL
KLFP
pressure. Normally, well kills are performed
at reduced pump rates (as compared to
drilling rates) and these slow pump rates
are know as SCRs (Slow Circulating Rates).
Slower pump rates are used during well kill
operations for a variety of reasons
including:
• Friction pressure in annulus is assumed
negligible
• Easier for choke operator to control
choke pressures
• Reduces wear and erosion of choke
manifold and choke components
• Easier to control barite additions and
MW maintenance
• Reduces the pressures on the wellbore
The readings recorded are actually the pressures associated with the slower pump
rates and are taken when:
• Changes in MW or mud properties
• Bit nozzles / BHA changes
• After each trip
• Every 500 ft of well depth
• After major pump/surface equipment changes or repairs
Friction Pressures for Subsea Choke and Kill Lines are

Required
For subsea operations, the choke and/or kill lines (when part of the flow path)
apply pressure on the wellbore. Because this friction pressure can be significant
due to water depth and the reduced ID of the lines, the Friction Pressures for the
Choke & Kill Lines are routinely measured, recorded, and accounted for.

1 20
Gas Law and Gas Behavior

Open Wellbore
Boyle’s Law
Boyle’s Law of Gas describes gas behavior relative

V2=20 bbl to pressure and volume.
MW
10 bbl 𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1 = 𝑃𝑃2 × 𝑉𝑉2
10.0 ppg
If the gas (due to density differences) moved (and

5000 ft TVD
expanded) up the well to 5000 ft TVD, what
Pgas=? would be the resulting pressure and volume of
Vgas=?
the gas?
The pressure of the gas would be equal to the HP
of the mud above:
𝑃𝑃2 = 0.052 × 10.0 × 5000 = 2600 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
10 bbl
Using Boyles Law the new volume of the gas
TVD
10,000 ft would be:
P1≅ 5200 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1 5200 × 10
(Neglecting HP of the gas) 𝑉𝑉2 = = = 20 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑃𝑃2 2600
Gas Migration SIDPP SICP

Boyle’s Law can also be used to predict well pressures 200 psi 200 psi
as gas migrates toward the surface in a closed in well.
Consider the shut-in well and conditions shown at
right. The well drilled into a pressured zone and shut-
in quickly and a 1 bbl kick taken.
If no volume is bled from the well, what would the MW
resulting increase in SIDPP, BHP, and SICP be if the 10.0 ppg
1 bbl gas bubble migrated upward 5000 ft (neglect the
HP of the 1 bbl of gas )?
Pgas
The pressure of the gas can be calculated by using
Boyles Law, the new pressure of the gas would be:
𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1 5400 × 1
𝑃𝑃2 = 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = = = 5400 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑉𝑉2 1 5000 ft
Resulting pressures would be:
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 0.052 × 10 × 5000 + 5400 = 8000 psi 1 bbl
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 8000 − 5200 = 2800 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

TVD
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
10,000 ft
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 5400 − 0.052 × 10 × 5000 = 2800 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Initial BHP=5400 psi
FP=5400 psi
1 21
Drilling Fluids Basics

Drilling Fluid Types

Water base mud

 Oil base mud / synthetic base mud
o effected by temperature and compressibility
Drilling Fluid properties (water base)

 Mud weight
 Flow properties regarding well control:
o Plastic viscosity (PV) - Has the most significant effect on friction
pressures
o Yield point (YP) Important for hole cleaning and effects friction
pressures (ECD, surge and swab)
o Gel strengths – causes static fluids to resist flow (may result in
pressure surges to “break the gels”)
 Fluid loss & cake thickness
 Base components – chlorides, calcium ion, etc.
Effects of Fluid Properties on BHP

 Water base mud, oil base / synthetic base mud
o High rheological properties contribute to
• Swabbing
• Poor mud displacement while cementing
• High ECDs
• Re-circulation of gas cut mud
o Low rheological properties cause:
• Poor hole cleaning
• Barite sag and settling
Mud Balance

1 22
Version 1.3
Tenet 2

controlled condition.”
“Always operate in a safe and
2 CAUSES OF KICKS
2 23
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 2 - Causes of Kicks
Improper Hole Fill

30
20 40 The drop in fluid level when pulling
pipe from a well can cause

10 50 hydrostatic pressure to drop below
bbl
0 60 formation pressure. Hole-fill should
be verified on a routine basis and is
usually done using a continuously
Trip Tank circulating tank of adequate
sensitivity.
Trip sheets must be used to record and compare the

actual fill volumes with the calculated pipe
displacement so that any abnormal fill-ups can be
detected and acted upon. Mud bucket (in good working
condition) should be used when pulling “wet” pipe to
capture the mud spilled when breaking connections
and returned to the trip tank for accounting.
TRIP SHEET (tripping out)

5
Displacement of _________ 19.50
inch __________ 0.0076 bbl/ft (dry) __________
ppf _________ 0.243 bbl/ft (wet)
Trip on: Singles Doubles X Stands 39

# of Stands to Casing Shoe: __________ stnds
Stand Trip Measured Calculated Discrepancy

Tank Hole Fill Fill/Disp
# Inc Vol Inc Cum Inc Cum Inc Cum Remarks
Strt 48.0 Pump 20 bbl slug OK!
1 1 47.2 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7 -0.1 -0.1 Pulling Dry
2 1 46.5 0.7 1.5 0.7 1.4 0 -0.1 Dry
3 1 45.9 0.6 2.1 0.7 2.1 0.1 0 Dry
4 1 45.4 0.5 2.6 0.7 2.8 0.2 0.2 Dry
5 1 45.2 0.2 2.8 0.7 3.5 0.5 0.7 Dry
10 5 44.0 1.2 4.0 3.5 7.0 2.3 3.0 Dry
15 5
20 5

- 2
Tripping Considerations
Trip Tank
A trip tank must be used to accurately monitor hole fill-up (and
returns) during trips. If possible, a circulating pump should be

used to continually circulate across the top of the hole while
tripping. Always stop the trip when filling or emptying the trip
tank or switching trip tanks. Allow the mud logger (if available)
to get accurate readings as well. Accurately record the fill history
on an approved “Trip Sheet”. This document is part of the
fingerprinting process.
Slugs
A slug should be pumped to allow for pulling pipe dry
whenever possible. The pumping of the slug should be
monitored using the PVT of the entire pit volume to accurately
measure volume returns while the slug is pumped and falls. Slug
volume and weight should be consistent from trip to trip when
practical.
Pumping Out
If hole conditions dictate, the drill pipe should be pumped out of
the hole to the casing shoe, liner top, or other pre-determined
depth to minimize swab pressures. A rig specific procedure
should be developed to ensure consistency, accurate
monitoring, and fingerprinting.
Tripping-In
The trip in shall be done with attention to running speeds to
prevent excessive surges. Be aware that high surge pressures
can be caused when initiating circulation and also when lowering
(or raising) the pipe during circulation.
Breaking Circulation
Very high surge pressures can be induced when breaking
circulation. Consider staging in the hole to help in breaking
circulation, particularly if the mud is in poor condition and gels
are high.

2 25
Abnormal Formation Pore Pressure

Pore Pressure is the pressure of the

naturally occurring fluids within “pore
spaces” of formations within the earth.
Pore pressure is generally classified as:

• Normal (Seawater 8.5 to 10.0 ppge)
• Abnormal (9.8 to Overburden)
• Subnormal (< 8.5 ppge)
Causes of abnormal
formation pressure include:
• Under–compaction of shale
• Anticline gas cap
• Uplifting / faulting
• Artesian effect
• Flow between zones Abnormally Pressured Shale
Under-compaction of Shale
In marine basins, the formations are
Sea Water formed over time by a process of
deposition, subsidence, and
compaction of sediments. The weight
or “overburden” of the sediments
causes subsidence, and compaction.
Formation Water
Migrating to Surface Compaction squeezes the marine
water present upward toward lower
pressure. If the flow of sea water in
the rock is impeded due to an
impermeable barrier (cap rock), the
Caprock or Impermeable Barrier fluids become abnormally pressured
and begin to support some of the
overbalance.
A change in the balance of the
sedimentation, subsidence,
compaction process, such as the case
for turbidite flows or other geologic
Under-compaction of Shale forces, can also cause shale to be
under-compacted.

- 4
Abnormal Formation Pressure-continued

Anticline Gas Cap

Abnormal pressure can also occur as the result of depth and structure
changes within a reservoir. Pressure encountered at the gas / water

contact may be normally pressure, which overpressures the top of the
gas cap due to the density difference between the formation water
and the compression of the gas.
Well B Well A Well A:

4000 ft x 0.465 = 1860 psi FP
3000 ft
1860
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = ~9.0 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 4000
GAS
Well B would encounter

WATER
Abnormal Pressure Due
to the Anticline
Well B:
𝑃𝑃𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 1860 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑃𝑃𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 1860 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 0.103 × 1000 = 1757 psi
1757
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = = 11.3 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 3000
Artesian Effect
Artesian springs carrying water from an elevated source can cause abnormal
pressure conditions when drilling near the base of the structure. This occurs in
mountainous or hilly geographic regions.
Flow Between Zones
Cross flow between zones can occur due to communication within the fault lines
or when drilling in an area where an underground blowout may have occurred.
Higher pressure from a lower zone is unchecked and flows to a shallower zone.

2 27
Abnormal Formation Pressure - continued

Faulting
A formation originally deposited
under normal pressure can be 8,000 ft

10,000 ft
uplifted due to tectonics or other
geological forces. The pressure 4650 psi
within the uplifted section is
trapped in the formation and is now 4650 psi
abnormal for that depth. There may
be no rig warning signs when
drilling into a fault. Abnormal Pressure Due to Faulting
Indicators of Abnormal Pressure Include:

• Change in the ROP
• Changes in the trends or drilling parameters such as torque
and drag
• Logging While Drilling (LWD) and Measurement While Drilling
(MWD)
• Increasing Background Gas, Trip Gas, and Connection Gas
• Change in size, shape, or volume of cuttings
• Changes in the mud properties such as chlorides and in the
flow-line temperature

2 28
Swabbing
Swabbing can occur whenever pipe is

pulled from the well or raised as when

making a connection. Swabbing is
dependent upon the rheology of the
drilling fluid, the speed at which pipe is
pulled, and the hydraulic diameters of the
tubulars and annulus (especially the BHA
and annulus). In some instances, swabbing
can reduce the BHP to a value lower than
the formation pressure, causing formation
fluid to enter the wellbore. This is known
as a “swabbed in” kick.
Influx From
High viscosity mud, tight annulus Swab Due to
clearances, packed BHA, and swelling Balled Up BHA
formations are some of the factors that
increase the risk of swabbing. In such
conditions, extra care should be taken
when moving the drill string upward.
Causes of Swabbing
• Pulling the pipe too fast

• Tight annular clearance
• High angle wells – cutting beds
• Poor fluid rheology
Indicators include:
• Torque / Drag
• Well flow w/upward pipe
movement
• Trip Tank Readings

- 7
Loss of Circulation
Loss of circulation can be very costly and

in severe cases can lead to a well control
incident. Drillers should remain vigilant
to fluid loss to the wellbore and Unconsolidated

excessive losses should be prevented if
possible. Attempts should be made to
cure the problem whenever it occurs.
Some causes of loss of circulation are:

Vugular
• Setting casing too shallow and not
gaining sufficient fracture strength
• Drilling with excessive overbalance
Cavernous
• Drilling too fast resulting in cuttings
loading the annulus
• Excessive swab/surge pressures
• Hole packing off
• Pore pressure regression / depleted
zones
If possible always keep the hole full,
even if it is with water. Be prepared to
Fractured
shut the well in. Formation
Seepage Loss (< 10 bbl/hr )

Gradual losses Losses Due to Natural Fractures
 Operation not interrupted
 Possible warning of increased Severe Loss (>35 bbl/hr)
loss severity
• Operations suspended
Partial Loss (10-35 bbl/hr) • Minimal return flow when
 Immediate drop in fluid level circulating
when pumps are stopped • Remedial action required
 Slow to regain returns after
starting circulation
Total Loss (No Returns)
 Returns flow stops immediately
 Operations usually interrupted
 Pump pressure decrease
 Remedial action required
 String weight increase (possible)
 Remedial action required

- 8
Version 1.3
KLP
Dilution of
drilling fluid
due to influx.
riser to kill mud.
Failing to displace
Low Density Fluid
Barite Settling & Sag

SIDPP

SICP
materials in
surface pits.
Pumping “light”
or Negative tests)
fluid pills (sweeps
Settling of weight
HUMAN ERROR!
2 31
- 9
2 - Causes of Kicks
Shallow Hazards
Shallow Hazard
A shallow hazard is a formation which has the potential to flow to the surface
and is encountered before a competent shoe is set (no BOP is installed). Types
of shallow hazards include both shallow water and shallow gas flow. The most
prudent option available is to avoid the hazard but if encountered the flow must
be diverted and personnel evacuated. Shallow hazards occur on land, and on
both bottom supported and floating operations.
Shallow gas is often due to unexpected pressure at the top of a gas bearing
zone and may be extremely prolific and capable of very high flow rates.
Offshore examples include: recently deposited sand lenses which become
totally enveloped by mudstones, as well as limestone reefs buried at a shallow
depth. These formations can be highly porous and permeable and may also be
unconsolidated which can cause severe erosion of BOP components when
diverting.
Problems Associated with Shallow Gas or Water Flows:

• Compromised wellbore integrity:
o Sediment washout (cement integrity)
o Casing collapse and buckling in nearby wells
o Formation of seafloor craters and mounds
o Project delays
• Very small reductions in BHP can result in underbalance conditions.
• High flow rates cause rapid reduction in hydrostatic pressure.
• Integrity of shallow shoe can be compromised if the well is shut-in.
• Gas may reach the surface very rapidly, risking crew and equipment.
Diverter
Hydraulic Divert Valves
Vent Line
Vent Line
Conductor Casing
Diverter System for Bottom Supported Rig

2 32
Shallow Hazards - continued

Planning:
• Seismic data (bright spots)

• Move surface location
• Drill directionally to avoid bright spots
• Proper cement design
Well Design:
• Offset Well Information
• If possible, design wells to install BOPs before encountering a potential
shallow hazard:
o Evaluate the probability of the casing shoe permitting shutting in
the well.
o Evaluate the consequences of shallow casing shoe failure (RUMS).
Rig Selection:
• Diverter system equipment
• Drill the shallow surface section riser-less if possible (MODU)
• Rig’s mooring and release mechanisms
• Crew experience/competence
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 0.052 × 0.5 × 1000 = 26 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Note:
At a depth of 1000 ft, a 0.5 ppg
increase in MW only results in a HP
increase of 26 psi. This makes it
very difficult to maintain adequate
1000’ TVD overbalance when an over-
pressured zone is encountered.
MW 8.5 → 9.0 ppg

2 33
Kick Awareness and Well Operations

Rig Operation Kick Awareness

Increased swab / surge risk

Filling casing while running, float equipment and
failures
Casing and
Cement hardening and hydrostatic pressure
Cementing Importance of waiting on cement time
Monitoring well while displacing / pumping mud and
cement volumes
Practices for displacing to lower density fluid

Wellbore Fluid
Displacement fluids and pressure effects across well
Displacements barriers
Risks and mitigations

Negative Testing Pressure differentials, formation fluids influx
Perforating and Handling influx volumes and types

Drill Stem Testing Underbalanced perforating
(DST) Reversing
Slick line
• Alloys available for H2S & CO2
• OD of wire is easy to seal around /packing element
in stuffing box
Wireline Braided line
Operations • Multi-strand, stronger than slick line
• OD of wire require a grease seal arrangement
e-line
• Multi-strand with internal wires sheathed with
insulating material

2 34
Kick Awareness & Well Operations – cont.


Lubricators
• Sufficient length to cover tool string
• 5000 psi, 10000 psi, & 15,000psi units
BOPs, Slick line Valve/Ram and Seal
• Manual or hydraulic
Wireline • Cannot manually open a hydraulic slick line valve
• Can manually close a hydraulic valve if fitting on
Operations valve is removed
(continued) • Seal can contain pressure without wire
Braided Line BOP
• Grease must be injected between upper and lower
rams to effect a seal on well pressure
• Should wire break, a ball check or pump out plug
will stop flow from the top of lubricator

2 35
Version 1.3
Tenet 6

of dedicated systems.”
“Always maintain the integrity
3 KICK INDICATORS
3 36
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 3 - Kick Indicators
Positive Indicators (Drilling)

DRILLER IS EMPOWERED TO
IMMEDIATELY SHUT THE WELL IN!
Flow With Pumps Off

Since a well is more likely to flow with the pumps off due to the loss of ECD,
stopping the pumps and checking for flow allows for detecting possible
underbalance while drilling.
Flow-Check Procedure
While Drilling:
1. Pick up off bottom
2. Shut the pump(s) off
3. Check for flow for a minimum of 15 minutes (do not break joint if on a
connection)
Chevron requires the Driller to shut-in immediately if there is

flow with pumps off.
Increase in Flow-Out
w/No Change in Flow-In
If the flow show device indicates an increase in flow returns. The Driller should
immediately shut in the well.
Increase in Pit Volume

If the pit volume totalizer (PVT) shows an increase in pit level . The Driller
should immediately shut in the well.

- 2
Positive Indicators (Tripping)

DRILLER IS EMPOWERED TO IMMEDIATELY

SHUT THE WELL IN!
Flow w/Pipe Static

Anytime flow is detected with the pipe static, the Driller is to immediately
shut- in the well.
Flow Checks While Tripping:

• Establish well is static prior POOH ( use trip sheets).
• Flow check prior to pulling BHA into the BOP stack.
Trip Log Deviation

A trip tank system providing continuous hole fill-up should be used when
tripping both in and out of the hole. A trip tank, allows comparison of fluid
volumes pumped into or returned from a well with the steel volumes pulled
out or run in. Using incremental and cumulative figures, if less fluid volume
than calculated is needed to fill the hole while tripping out, or more fluid is
displaced out of the hole than calculated while tripping in, a flow check should
be performed.
If the flow check is positive, the well should be immediately shut in. If the flow
check is negative, trip to bottom carefully, circulate bottoms up, and condition
the mud.
Note:
When pulling a wet drill string (from a closed drill pipe float or plugged pipe
for whatever reason), internal string volume lost must be considered in
calculations unless it is recaptured into a measured mud tank.

- 3
Flow Check Opportunities

Drilling
• After any drilling break

• Prior to making any connection during
drilling
• Before and after running a survey
• Prior to slip and cut operations
Tripping
• Anytime pipe displacement or hole-fill is
incorrect during a trip
• Prior to pulling or running non-shearables
through the BOP
Subsea
• Anytime a trip is suspended in order to
boost the riser
• Prior to recommencing a trip after boosting
the riser
During wireline operations

While testing the BOPs
After any well control operation
After unseating a packer
After cutting a casing string
Any time Driller is in doubt as to the
occurrence of a kick
3 39
Possible Kick Indicators

Real Time Warning Signs that Require Investigation

by Crew Members but Do Not Require Immediate

Well Shut-in.
Reduction in Pump Pressure or Increase

In Stroke Rate
A loss of pump pressure and a corresponding increase in the pump rate may
occur due to the differential pressure between the drill string and annulus
when an influx is in the well. A washout in the drill string can have the same
indicators, but the Driller should always react as if a kick is occurring and
conduct a flow check to verify the well is static.
Drilling Breaks
A sudden change in ROP is known as a drilling break. This may be either an
increase or a decrease in penetration rate and can reflect a sudden change in
down-hole conditions. This sudden change could coincide with changes in
formation type, permeability, fluid content, or pressure.
If the bit penetrates a formation that is underbalanced due to insufficient

mud hydrostatic pressure, penetration rate may increase dramatically.
LWD Resistivity Decrease
LWD (Logging While Drilling) conducts a real time electric-log of formation

resistivity while drilling. The under-compacted shale in an abnormally pressured
zone will have more natural “sea water” in the pore spaces. As a result the
resistivity value decreases and the shale becomes more “conductive”.

- 5
Possible Kick Indicators - continued

Increase in Torque & Drag

Increased drag and / or torque are often noted when drilling into over-pressured
formations. This is due to the inability of the under-balancing mud column to hold
back physical encroachment of the formation into the wellbore.
Drag and rotating torque are indirect indicators of overpressure. Increases often
may indicate that a transition zone is being drilled. Up drag and down drag, as well
as off bottom & while drilling torque values, should be recorded at pre-
determined intervals (often at each pipe connection) and plotted. Plots should be
reviewed for changes in trends that may indicate an impending problem.
Bottoms Up Warning Signs of Increasing Formation

Pressure that Require Investigation by Crew Members
but Do Not Require Immediate Well Shut-in.
Changes in Mud Properties & Increase in

Flow-line Temperature
A change in fluid properties after bottoms-up circulation clearly indicates that
formation fluid has entered the wellbore. Mud chlorides may increase due to an
increase of pore volume when drilling “under-compacted” shale. Usually the pore
space contains native waters which may add chlorides to the mud system.
In some muds, the viscosity will increase when salt water enters the wellbore and
mixes with the mud. This is called flocculation because the small particles of mud
solids, which are normally dispersed, form small clumps called flocs.
In oil-based muds, water contamination acts as a “solid” and causes viscosity
increases.
Abnormally pressured shale is usually beneath an impermeable formation which
serves an insulating barrier. This causes the pressured shale to be at a higher
temperature than that of a normally pressured zone and is usually indicated by an
increase in flow-line temperature of the returning mud.

- 6
Possible Kick Indicators -continued

Increase in Connection, Background, and

Trip Gas
Background Gas
Background gas describes the residual gas units measured during routine
drilling operations. It can be thought of as a baseline to compare increases and
usually manifests as an increasing trend as more open hole is exposed. When a
transition zone is penetrated, the background gas will increase at a rate in
excess of the normal trend.
Connection Gas
Whenever the pumps are stopped to allow for a connection, bottom-hole
pressure is reduced by the loss of ECD. This allows for a small quantity of gas to
enter the wellbore. It is indicated when pumped to the surface and displayed as
an increase in gas units appropriate to the bottoms-up time. Connection gas
peaks can also be influenced by swabbing, as the pipe is raised for a
connection.
Trip Gas
Trip gas is similar to connection gas but is usually greater in magnitude because
of the increased non-pumping time and the increased chances of swabbing.
Trip gas peaks will show on bottoms up after a round trip or after a time of non-
drilling activity. Swabbing of a formation exposed up hole may cause trip gas
peaks to correlate from a shallower depth than that of bottoms-up. Lag time
calculations may help determine the location of the formation producing the
trip gas peak.
Changes in Cuttings Volume, Shape and

Size
Increasing pore pressure results in the HP becoming near balance and even
underbalanced to the pore pressure. This causes borehole stability problems
due to lack of hydrostatic support. Large quantities of cavings can “slough” or
“pop”into the wellbore as a result. Shale cavings tend to be long and splintery.

- 7
Connection and Trip Gas Patterns

Connection gas patterns can help detect entry into a

transition zone of increasing formation pore pressure.
Gas →
0 0 0
CG CG
CG CG CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
CG
Time
PP < ESD < ECD ESD < PP < ECD ESD < ECD < PP
Equivalent Static ESD is less than PP ESD and ECD are

Density greater than and Pore Pressure both less than PP
Pore Pressure Increasing and Pore Pressure
(Transition Zone) Increasing

3 43
Ballooning
“Ballooning” can occur as the mud weight in use approaches the

formation fracture MW value. If surge or ECD pressures exceed the

minimum horizontal stress within exposed formation, fractures may
open allowing mud flow into the fractures. When the pump is
stopped (as in the case of making a connection) the down-hole
pressure reduction allows the fractures to close, and mud is
squeezed back into the wellbore. This effect, which can make the
well appear to be kicking, is known as “ballooning”.
Fractures Open
Allowing Mud
Flow
Wellbore Pressure Wellbore Pressure

< Min Horizontal Stress > Min Horizontal Stress
Prerequisite Condition of Ballooning that Must Occur:

Previous loss of fluids down-hole with pumps on.
Indications of Ballooning:
• The well flows with pumps off but the initial flow will gradually
reduce with time.
• If the well is shut-in, there may be low initial shut in casing
pressure, this pressure will be no higher than the annular friction
pressure from surface to the point of fluid loss. The casing
pressure will bleed off and not build back up when conducting a
trapped pressure check.
• ECD approaching fracture pressure.

- 9
Ballooning - continued
If the flow on connections is suspected to be “ballooning”, the

initial response should be to treat the flow as a kick and shut-in
the well. It is also recommended to circulate bottoms up using a

constant BHP method.
Flow-back Volume (bbl) →
Kick
Flowback
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Connections Time →
If ballooning conditions persist on subsequent connections, the

return flow can and should be finger printed. If on any subsequent
connection the finger print does not match the previous flow trend
the well should be again shut in and circulated out using the first
circulation of the Drillers Method.

- 10
Version 1.3
Tenet 3

place and functioning.”
4 WELL SHUT-IN
“Always ensure safety devices are in
4 46
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 4 - Well Shut-in
While Drilling
1. Space Out
Rig Floor
Driller should always know
the space out to prevent a
tool joint from being across Height RKB
To Annular BOP
a BOP element during well
control operations.
2. Shut Down
After picking up to “space

out” height, the Driller must
stop the pumps to prevent
pressure from being trapped
on the well.
3. Shut-in
Close a preventer to a closed

choke. Then Open the HCR
Valve to record the SICP.
ALWAYS VERIFY THE WELL IS
SHUT IN!

- 2
While Tripping
1. Stab Safety Valve

Safety valve (fully opened)

and functioning tool must be
readily available on rig floor.
Note: Only have the proper
ONE! Close SV after making Rig Floor
up.
2. Space Out
Driller should always know the

Space Out to prevent a Tool Joint
from being across a BOP element
during well control operations.
3. Shut-in
Close a preventer to a closed

choke. Then Open the HCR
Valve to record SICP.

- 3
Always Verify Well is Shut-in

Inspect BOP Stack

for Leaks
Walk around and inspect the

BOP stack for any visible leaks
from weep holes, flanges,
outlet valves etc. Also monitor
for possible flow through the
bell nipple and flow line back
into rig pits or trip tank.
For subsea wells, line up riser
to trip tank and monitor for
flow.
Confirm Manifold & Line-up for Hard Shut-in
HC1(NC) 13(NC)
HC2(NC) 12(NO) 15(NO)
5(NC)
To
4(NC) 8(NO) MGS
From BOP 6(NO)
9(NC)
1(NO) 3(NC) 7(NC)
2(NC)
MC2(NC) 11(NC)
MC1(NC) 10(NC) 14(NC)

Primary Flow Path

- 4
Critical Shut-in Considerations

Shut-in Procedures Must be Written and

Posted for all Rig Operations Including:

• Tripping / Drilling
• While Out of Hole
• Running Casing, Liners & Cementing
• For Wireline / Slickline Operations
Shut-in Considerations
BOPE arrangement and specifications

• Tool Joint Location
• Initial Closing (annular vs. ram)
• Closing Time
• Size, closing/shearing pressure, closing volume
• Non-Shearables across BOP Stack
Temperature / H2S
• Packing Elements
• Internal Seals Work Pipe?
• OBM / WBM Yes / No
Pipe in Hole (current operation)
• Pipe TJ across Stack
• Pipe On/Off Bottom
• No Pipe in Hole
Wireline in Hole
• Lubricator (pressure rating)
• No Lubricator: Annular, cut-drop

- 5
Diverting
Ensure diverter valves open

prior to diverter element

closing.
Downwind Side
Procedure (below)
For JU Rig with Conventional Diverter
The following procedure serves only as an example.
Prepare a specific diverter procedure for each rig.
While Drilling or Tripping
1. Upon noticing the first positive indicator of well
flow (pit gain or increase in flow or flow with
pumps off):
2. Sound the alarm – long blast on driller’s air
horn.
3. Close the diverter. (This should open both vent valves, close the fill-up line
and shaker valve, and close the diverter element.)
4. Close the upwind vent line valve if necessary.
5. Notify the Drill Site Manager and Toolpusher. Prepare for immediate
evacuation of the rig.
6. Evacuation procedures should ensure that rig power is shut down, and all
potential sources of ignition are eliminated.

- 6
Version 1.3
Tenet 4
procedures.”

5 BOP EQUIPMENT
“Always follow safe work practices and
552- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 5 – BOP Equipment
BOP Stack
API Classification of BOPs

Chevron policy is to “meet or exceed” the

recommendations described by API
Standard 53 with regard to BOP
equipment requirements. Please refer to
Standard 53 for guidance when specifying
BOPE for any well. Blowout preventer
equipment is based on rated working
pressure, the most commonly used (2000,
3,000, 5000, 10000, 15000, 20000,
25000, and 30000 psi ) are designated as
2K, 3K, 5K, 10K, 15K, 20K, 25K, and 30K.
Working Pressure Requirements
To select the working pressure rating for a
particular stack, start with the assumption
that the preventer equipment will be
required to contain the maximum
pressure that the highest pressured
reservoir could impose at the surface. As
a safety factor, add the differential
between that pressure value and the next
higher nominal rated working pressure.
API Standard 53 classification or “class” of a BOP stack is the total number of ram
and annular preventers in the BOP stack.
The alphanumeric designation shall be assigned to the quantity of pressure
containment sealing components in the vertical wellbore of a BOP stack. The
rams or ram cavities are to be designated with an “R” followed by the numeric
quantity of rams or ram cavities. After the classification of the BOP stack has been
identified, the next nomenclature identifies the quantity of annular type
preventers installed. Example: A Class 6 BOP system installed with two annular
and four ram type preventers is designated as “Class 6-A2-R4”.
The arrangement of preventers and outlets on the stack should provide means
to:
• Close and seal on the DP, tubing, casing, or liner and allow circulation
• Close and seal on open hole and allow volumetric well control operations
• Strip the drill string

5 53
CVX Surface Well Control Systems Requirements

Application WO D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C

MASP (psi) 0 - 500 0 - 500 501 - 1500 501 - 3,500 7,500 12,500 75% RWP
Minimum RWP of
2K or less 2K or less 2000 5000 10,000 15,000 >15,000
rams* (psi)
Use of Csg Head
Yes Yes No No No No No
Outlets Allowed
Use of BOP side
Yes Yes Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1 Yes1
Outlets Allowed
Drilling Spool
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Required
Minimum ID of
2" 2" 3" 3" 3" 3" 3"
Outlets (in)
Hydraulic Operated
Ram Type BOP's No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Required
Hydraulic Operated
"Fail Close" C/K Valves
Required (minimum
one each)
Manual Operated C/K
Valves (supplement Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Hyd. Valve)
Check Valve Required No No No2 No2 No2 No2 No2
Class 2 -
API BOP Classification
A0/R2 Class 5-
(note: in accordance
Class 2 - A1/R4
with S53, the first ram Class 3 - Class 3 - Class 3 - Class 4 - Class 4 -
A2/R0 or
to be installed shall be A1/R2 A1/R2 A1/R2 A1/R3 A1/R3
or Class 5 -
a Blind Ram or
Class 2 - A2/R3
Blind/Shear Ram).
A1/R1
Minimum of two
closures required for
wireline, pipe and
casings/liners.
Shear Rams Required No No Yes3 Yes3 Yes3 Yes3 Yes3
Annular
Pipe Annular Annular
Shearing
Pipe Spool Annular Annular Shearing Shearing
Blind
Allowable Blind Blind Shearing Shearing Blind Blind
Pipe
Configurations or or Blind Blind Pipe Pipe
Pipe
(Top to Bottom) Annular Annular Spool Spool Spool Spool
Spool
Blind Spool Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe
Pipe
Blind

5 54
CVX Surface Well Control Systems Requirements

Continued
Application WO D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C WO / D&C

MASP (psi) 0 - 500 0 - 500 501 - 1500 501 -3,500 7,500 12,500 75% RWP
Pit Volume Totalizer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Flow Show
Indicator(s)
Flowline Gas
No No Yes4 Yes4 Yes4 Yes4 Yes4
Detection
Drill String Float No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 x Inside BOP (for
each connection size No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
& type)
2 x Drill String Safety
Valves (for each
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
connection size &
type)
Mud Gas Separator No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Trip Tank No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mechanical or
Vacuum Type No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Degasser
Capping Stack
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Capabilities 5
* = Based on the combined loading of the end connection as provided in API 16AF.
1 = Must have incorporated into PM Program a rigorous inspection process. (NTE Yearly)
2 = Not required because Hydraulically operated "Fail Close Valve(s)" installed.
3 = When BSR's are installed, they must have the shearing capabilities to shear the drill pipe, tubing and
those casings / liners installed across a production zone or exposed hydrocarbons that are capable of
flowing to surface.
4 = When clear, low viscosity fluids are used and the gas will break out in the BOP before it enters the
flowline, eliminating the necessity for installing flowline gas detector.
5= The BU well control plan must identify the interfaces required for the installation of a capping stack,
snubbing unit, coil tubing and wireline lubricator system. The well control plan must also include the
inspection, maintenance and testing requirements that need to be implemented to preserve those
interfaces in the event they are needed.

5 55
BOP Stack
BOP Stack Considerations

• The wellhead component below

the BOP stack must be tested.
Annular
• Use of master rams for well kills
is not recommended.
SBR
• Use of drilling spool outlets are
Pipe Ram recommended for well control
operations.
Pipe Ram
• Shear/blind rams are
recommended in the top
position.
Pipe Ram • Use of original equipment
manufacturer (OEM) parts is
required.
BOPE Testing (Per API STD 53)

Function test: Testing Criteria
• Weekly, alternating between  Use water to test BOPs.
remote panels  Pump through MGS, choke and kill
Pressure test: lines, manifold and valves.
• Prior to spud or upon  Check (choke panel) gauge
installation accuracy.
• After disconnection or repair  Provide means to prevent pressure
of any pressure containment buildup in the casing (such as
seal, but limited to the opening casing valves).
effected component  Stabilize pressure for at least five
• Not to exceed 21 days or per minutes.
local regulations  Apply low pressure test of 250–350
• Do not apply high pressure test psi.
before low pressure test is  Ensure weep hole is open
complete, per API/BSEE
guidelines.

- 5
BOP Stack - continued

Ram Secondary Packing

Vent
(weep) hole
Plastic injection screw
Secondary packing
Check valve
Primary
packing
O-Rings
Piston
Weep hole location
• Open chamber is vented back to accumulator

• Vent should not be blocked
Ram and Auxiliary Equipment Testing

• High pressure test the ram BOPs to the lowest value of either the:
– Maximum rated working pressure of the rams.
– Maximum rated working pressure of the wellhead.
• Subsequent high pressure test to a pressure greater than MASP, not
MAASP (API Std 53), but not to exceed the rated working pressure
Note: Test wellhead/wellhead outlets/choke manifold/choke and kill lines/BOP
connection to low/high pressure.
Annular BOP Testing

Initial high pressure test to 70% of rated working pressure or ram test pressure,
whichever is less.
Subsequent high pressure test is the same as initial pressure testing.
“Packer creep” may cause some initial pressure bleed off.

5 57
Ram BOPs
Ram types: Performance Issues:

• Pipe rams • Differential pressure across rams from
• Variable pipe rams above

• Shear rams • Closing / Opening Ratios of pistons
• Blind rams • Hydraulic area of closing pistons for
• Blind / shear rams shearing pipe
• Hydraulic fluid volume to open and close
• Minimum hydraulic fluid operating
pressure requirements
Example: Closing Ratio
Consider a ram with an 11” piston and a 4” ram shaft. Calculate the closing ratio.
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 2 = 0.785 × 112 = 95.0 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 2 = 0.785 × 42 = 12.6 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 95.0
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = = = 7.54
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 12.6
What “adjusted operating pressure” would be required to close this ram against 15,000 psi
maximum BOP working pressure?
1. Calculate:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 15000
Equivalent Closing Pressure Loss= = = 1990 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 7.54
2. Calculate:
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 1500 + 1990 = 3490 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
NOV: Product Bulletin PC-92-006-SF Rev 3, Feb 2014
Drill pipe F opening =12.6 sq in x 15000 psi

=189,000 lbs
Ram
Preventer
F closing =95 sq in x 1990 psi

=189,000 lbs

5 58
Ram BOPS: Shearing Ratio

Drill pipe Shear Ram Booster Ram Booster

Preventer Shaft Area Piston
Main Operator Booster

Piston Area Piston Area
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 − 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 =
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
Example: Shearing Ratio

Consider a ram with a 14” main cylinder diameter and a 4 1/4” ram shaft with a booster
cylinder diameter of 10” with a booster shaft diameter of 4” . Calculate the Shearing
Ratio.
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 2 = 0.785 × 142 = 153.86 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 2 = 0.785 × 4.252 = 14.18 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 2 = 0.785 × 102 = 78.5 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 0.785 × 𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 2 = 0.785 × 42 = 12.56 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2
78.5 + 153.86 − 12.56 219.8
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = = = 15.50
14.18 14.18
What “adjusted operating pressure” would be required to shear and seal with this ram against
15,000 psi maximum BOP working pressure?
1. Calculate:
𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 15000
Equivalent Closing Pressure Loss= = = 968 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 15.50
2. Calculate:
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 1500 + 968 = 2468 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
NOV: Product Bulletin PC-92-006-SF Rev 3, Feb 2014
NOTE: Use MASP as the input for wellbore pressure to ensure the accumulator has
sufficient operating pressure to shut-in and / or shear the drill pipe being used
(under MASP conditions).

5 59
Annular Preventers
Annular preventers have a doughnut-shaped element with bonded steel

reinforcing. Extrusion of the element into the wellbore is effected by upwards
movement of a hydraulically actuated piston. The element is designed to seal
around most shapes or sizes of pipe and to close off on an open hole.
Types (Manufacturers)
• Hydril (MSP, GK, GL, and GX)
• NOV / Shaffer (Spherical )
• Cameron (Type D)
Performance Issues
• Closing pressure coupled with wellbore pressure can cause high internal
stress in the element, thus reducing the effective life.
• Flush cavities and inspect element after each well.
• Drilling tools (bits) should be run with caution through the BOP to prevent
element wear.
• Only close on open hole in emergencies as causes excessive wear on
element.
• Reduce closing pressure when stripping, lower tool joints slowly through
element.
• Rotation and / or reciprocation of pipe through the annular is possible but it
can cause excessive wear on the element.
Rubber Packing Element
Opening Port Annular Regulator
Closing Port
Annular
Preventer
Operating
Piston/Cylinder
3000 psi
600 - 1200 psi
Atmospheric

5 60
Diverters
A diverter system is designed to route shallow hazard flows away from the drilling
rig/platform while allowing time for evacuation of rig personnel. The diverter is
installed on conductor or drive pipe prior to running the surface casing and
installing a full BOP stack and choke manifold. The diverter works similarly to the
annular preventer and is designed to pack off around the kelly, drill string or casing
and direct flow to a safe location. Valves in the system direct the well flow when
the diverter is actuated.
Conventional annular blowout preventers or rotating heads are commonly used as
diverters. The rated working pressure of the diverter and vent line(s) is not of
prime importance; rather they are sized to permit diversion of well fluids while
minimizing wellbore backpressure. A minimum of 10 in. vent lines are required for
land and jack-ups and a minimum of 12 in. diameter for floaters.
Bell
Flowline Nipple
Automatic
Pump
Accumulator
Unit
MSP 30 in.
Close
Open Diverter Vent
Line Drilling
Spool
Full Opening Valve

(Automatically Opens
when Diverter is Closed) 30 in. Drive
or
Conductor Pipe
-
MSP 30 inch Diverter
Rigged for Surface Installation

5 61
BOP Control System

The BOP control system should be equipped with a minimum of three control
manifolds; main control at the accumulator unit, a Driller’s control panel located
on the rig floor, and a remote panel which may be located in the Toolpusher’s
office or other safe location.
Main control unit components

• A regulator to reduce accumulator pressure to manifold (operating) pressure
for the ram preventers and valves.
• A regulator to reduce accumulator pressure to the variable operating
pressure for the annular preventer(s).
• Control handles, or switches, for all functions. A hinged cover should be
placed over critical functions (shear/blind rams, wellhead disconnect, etc.).
• Pressure gauges for accumulator, manifold, and annular pressures
• A valve to bypass the manifold regulator
• Tie-in points for accumulators, charge pumps, remote panels and air lines
• A vent line for bleeding off accumulator fluid to the reservoir tank
• A pressure relief valve for the hydraulic and electric pumps
• Bottles
Main Control Unit

5 62
BOP Control System - continued

Driller’s panel
• Controls for each BOP stack function
and to adjust the manifold regulators

• Read-outs for the accumulator
pressure, regulated manifold and
annular pressures and flow-meter (if
any)
• Air supply pressure display
• A schematic of the BOP arrangement
showing kill and choke line outlets
and having ram sizes marked
• Covers, or interlocks, for critical
functions
• Visual and / or audible warning
alarms for low accumulator pressure,
air pressure, or fluid levels
Remote panel
• Controls for each BOP function
• Schematic of BOP arrangement,
showing kill and choke line outlets
and ram sizes and positions
• Covers or locks for critical functions
• Visual and / or audible warning
alarms for low accumulator pressure, Driller’s Panel
air pressure, or fluid levels
Always leave in OPEN or CLOSE position during normal use.

Block only when rig move or repair.
Regulated
Supply psi
OPEN
To BOP From BOP

Open Close
3 Position
To
4- Way
Reservoir Valve / Solenoid (close position)

5 63
Typical Accumulator System

Bank of Bottles
Air Power Source
(100 – 130 psi) Hydro-

Pneumatic
Switch
Bank Isolator Valve R

PUMP E
(AIR) S
E
R
PUMP
V
O
I
Bank Bleeder Valve
R
Power Source
Electric
#2 (electric) Pressure
Switch
ACCUMULATOR
PRESSURE
Manifold
By-Pass Valve MANIFOLD
Manifold Annular An PRESSURE
Regulator Regulator Reg
ANNULAR
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
C O
O
ANNULAR
RAM RAM RAM HCR To C
Reservoir
0 psi 1500 psi 500-1500 psi 3000 psi

5 64
Accumulator Fluid Volumes

1000 3000 1200

psi psi psi
3.3 gal
N2
8.3 gal
10 gal N2
6.7 gal 5 gal
N2
Hyd
Fluid
1.7 gal
H Fluid
Fully Operating Fully

Precharged Condition Expended
𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔𝐔 𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀𝐀 𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃𝐃 𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕𝐕
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑉𝑉𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 = 𝑉𝑉𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 × −
𝑃𝑃𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑃𝑃𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
1000 1000
𝑉𝑉𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 = 10 × − = 10 × 0.833 − 0.333 = 5 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
1200 3000
3000 psi System 5000 psi System
Pre-charge - 1000 psi Pre-charge - 1500 psi

Manifold – 1500 psi Manifold – 1500 psi
Minimum Usable Fluid Volume (Chevron)
1.5 Times the volume necessary to close all applicable BOPE

components one time and open the hydraulic valve(s), with a
minimum of 200 psi above pre-charge remaining.

5 65
Accumulator Drawdown Test (API STD 53)

Purpose of Test:
• Verify the system is able to support the volume and pressure requirements of
the BOPs in use.
• Ensure the system is capable of securing the well in event of total loss of
power.
• Checks the plumbing and valve line-up
• Ensure each bottle is working appropriately
Shall be performed after the initial nipple-up of the BOPs, after any repairs that
required isolation/partial isolation of the system, or every 6 months from previous
test.
Procedure Surface Stack (API STD 53)
1. Position a properly sized joint of DP or test mandrel in the BOPs.

2. Turn off the power supply to all accumulator charging pumps (air, electric,
etc.).
3. Record the initial accumulator pressure. Manifold and annular regulators shall
be set at the manufacturer’s recommended operating pressure for the BOP
stack.
4. Individually close a maximum of four (4) pipe rams with the smallest operating
volumes (except blind or blind shear ram BOPs) and record the closing times.
To simulate closure of the blind or blind shear rams, open one set of the pipe
rams.
5. Open the hydraulic operated valve(s) and record the closing time.
6. Close the (largest volume) annular BOP and record the closing time.
7. Record the final accumulator pressure. The final accumulator pressure shall be
equal to or greater than 200 psi above pre-charge pressure.
Closing Times:
• Each ram shall close in 30 seconds or less.
• Annular BOPs less than 18 ¾ inch must close in 30 seconds or less.
• Annular BOPs 18 ¾ inch or greater must close in 45 seconds or less.

5 66
Choke Manifold Valve Positions

For Hard Shut-in While Drilling and Tripping

A numbering scheme for all valves and chokes should be

put into place to eliminate confusion when lining up any
manifold for drilling and tripping operations. In addition to
the numbering scheme, a recommended choke manifold
specific diagram showing valve / choke lineup
requirements (normally open (NO), and normally closed
(NC) for hard shut while drilling or tripping. It is
recommended this diagram be posted on the choke
manifold and in the dog house for quick reference by the
rig crews.
Example Manifold & Proper Valve Positions

HC1(NC) 13(NC)
HC2(NC) 12(NO) 15(NO)
5(NC)
To
HCR MGS
4(NC) 8(NO)
6(NO)
9(NC)
1(NC) 1(NO) 3(NC) 7(NC)
2(NC)
MC2(NC) 11(NC)
MC1(NC) 10(NC) 14(NC)

Primary Flow Path

5 67
Detection Equipment
Pit Volume Totalizer (PVT)

Pit volume measuring systems, complete with audible and visual alarms, should be
installed to detect fluid gains and/or losses. These devices transmit a signal from
sensors located in the drilling fluid pits to instrumentation near the Driller’s station
on the rig floor.
Flow Rate Sensor

A flow rate sensor, complete with audible and visual alarms, should be mounted in
the flow line to provide for early detection of formation fluid entering the well or of
loss of returns
Sample Flow Rate and PVT Indicators Display

5 68
Version 1.3
Tenet 1

environmental limits.”
“Always operate within design and
6 KICK TOLERANCE
669- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 6 - Kick Tolerance
Maximum Anticipated Surface Pressure (MASP)

Used to design the well program:

Casing design (casing burst/collapse)
•
• BOP pressure requirements
• Wellhead pressure requirements
Assumptions (typically specific to well, SBU, or field):

• Partial/total evacuation of well “worst case”
• Known pore pressure profile
• Known fracture gradient
Example: Total Evacuation

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 0.052 × 14.5 × 12400 − 0.1 × 12400 (𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒)
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 9350 − 1240 = 8110 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
8110 MASP
Gas Gradient = 0.1 psi/ft
Gas Sand @ 12400’ TVD

Pore Pressure = 14.5 ppge = 9350 psi

- 2
Maximum Initial Shut In Casing Pressure (MISICP)

SICP MISICP
MISICP Relevance
MISICP is a description of initial shut-in

conditions only and is used for well kill planning
to determine:
• Pump Rate
• Selection of Safety Factors
• Calculation of Kick Tolerance
If the initial shut-in casing pressure equals or

exceeds the MISCIP, the shoe may be
Influx compromised.
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
Leak-Off Test (LOT)

The strength of the weak point of a well is measured by the Leak-Off Test (LOT) or
Formation Integrity Test (FIT). FIT/LOT is used for MISICP, MAASP, and KT
calculations. Therefore effort should be made to obtain a quality LOT (or FIT). The
formation Fracture Pressure is exceeded when conducting a LOT, and the
equivalent MW value is recorded. The LOT does not change as drilling progresses
but the MISICP value does (as MW changes).
Example: Typical LOT Plot

Shoe TVD = 4,800 ft
MW=10.2 ppg
LOT Pressure =620 psi ● ● ●
620 psi ●
● ●
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 ● ●
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + ●
Test Pressure
0.052 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 Leak-off Point

●
620 ●
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 10.2 +
0.052 × 4800 ●
●
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 12.68 = 12.6 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
●
Note: Always Round Down For LOT

Determination! Volume Pumped (1/4 bbl increments)

- 3
Maximum Allowable Annular Shut-in Pressure (MAASP)

1 Influx Below the Shoe

CP 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
Remains Constant
The HP above the shoe remains constant even as

the gas is circulated up the well and expands.
Therefore, the MAASP remains constant during
this period even though the casing pressure is
increasing.
Max Shoe Pressure
= Gas @ Shoe
The increasing casing pressure and the constant

HP above the shoe causes the shoe pressure to
increase to a maximum just as the top of the
influx reaches shoe depth.
2 Influx Above the Shoe

CP
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
Decreasing due
to gas expansion
ℎ 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
The HP above the shoe is now decreasing as the gas

is circulated up the well and expands. Therefore the
MAASP value is increasing at the same rate that HP
is being lost. This is why the MISICP is no longer a
determinate of “breaking the shoe down” once the
influx is above the shoe.
Note: The maximum surface casing pressure occurs

when the top of the influx first reaches the surface.

- 4
Kick Tolerance (KT)

Definition:
Kick Tolerance is the maximum kick volume (KV) for a given kick intensity (KI) at a
particular depth that can be successfully shut-in and circulated out of a well
without exceeding the well’s weak point fracture pressure.
Applications:
1. Design KT
Kick tolerance criteria should be specified for each planned hole section
with the designed KT criteria associated with that interval’s TD.
2. Operational KT (During Drilling Operations)
For the wellbore being drilled the kick tolerance will change from day to
day due to the changes in mud weight and the increasing depth of the
well. For these reasons, the “actual” KT should be calculated regularly and
discussed with the drill crew to reinforce the importance of early kick
detection and well shut-in.
Determination:
The wellbore is under increased pressure during well control operations. This
includes from initial shut-in to circulating out and killing the well. The
MISICP/MAASP value is the indication used for shoe “breakdown” during the shut-
in and initial circulation phase and is the primary parameter associated with
calculating KT.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 × ℎ 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
By setting the CP at shut-in and when circulating the influx to the shoe (maximum
condition of shoe stress) equal to MISICP/MAASP allows a determination of the
“window” of KV values for varying kick intensity.
For KV=0
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎

●
KI (psi or ppg)
For KI=0
KT Window 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
●
KV (bbl)

- 5
Operational KT
Kick Intensity (KI)

• Kick Intensity is the pressure difference
between the hydrostatic pressure in the SIDPP
well and the formation pore pressure SICP

(usually expressed as a ppg term). It is
the same physical quantity as SIDPP but
in ppg instead of psi. For example, if we
took a 1.6 ppg kick , this would mean
that the HP in the well is 1.6 ppg MW = 13.0 ppg
underbalanced with respect to
9 5/8”,47#
formation pore pressure. @ 4200 TVD
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 LOT=14.8 ppge
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 =
ACF= 0.046 bpf
Kick Volume (KV)
• Kick Volume is the volume of formation
fluid that entered the wellbore. The
volume gained at the surface will ACF= 0.029 bpf
650 ft
provide an indication of this volume.
Maximum height of gas influx (KH max)
• KH max is the maximum vertical height of Drilling 8 ½” Hole
influx for a given KI anywhere in the @ 9800’ TVD
open hole that if reached will cause leak-
off to the the formation.
Procedure : Example (Gas Kick of 2.0 ppg density)

1. Calculate MISICP & ensure this value is up to date.
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 0.052 × 14.8 − 13 × 4200 = 393 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2. Calculate maximum kick intensity (KI max) with KV = 0.
393
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = = 0.77 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 9800
3. The vertical kick height (KH) can be calculated for any given KI. Calculate
maximum kick height (KHmax) with KI = 0 (swabbed kick).
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 0.052 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤𝑤 393 − 0.052 × 0 × 9800
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = = = 687 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.052 × (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 ) 0.052 × 13 − 2
4. Calculate maximum static kick volume (KVstatic) with the influx on bottom using
(KHmax).
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵&𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 650 × 0.029 + (687 − 650) × 0.046 = 20.5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
- 6
Operational KT - continued
5. Using the same KHmax calculate kick volume with the top of the gas at the
casing shoe (KVshoe). (Note: Skip this step for Oil or Saltwater Influx)
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 687 × 0.046 = 31.6 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
6. Calculate the KVdynamic by using P1V1=P2V2 to convert KVshoe to conditions on

bottom (KVdynamic). (Skip for Oil or Saltwater Influx).
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 =
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 3232 × 31.6
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = = = 15.4 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 0 + 6625
7. Compare both KVstatic and KVdynamic . Use the lesser volume as KV in KT window
(for KI=0). Plot only the KV static value for Oil or Saltwater Influx.
8. Identify KT window for the well.
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = 0.77 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = 15.4 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 20.5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
KT Window for Example Well – Chart Made Using

The Chevron Rig Site Well Control app.
The KT window can be constructed (sufficiently accurate) by drawing a straight

line from KImax and KV (dynamic and static). The Chevron Rig Site Well Control
app calculates the KV for varying KIs from zero KI to KImax.

- 7
Design Kick Tolerance

Design KT can be used to check that a planned

hole section TD can be reached with a specified
KT target.
Example:
Plan is to drill 8 ½” hole to 9800’ TVD/MD
with a planned MW of 13.0 ppg at TD. The 9 5/8”,47#
well plan calls for setting 9 ⅝ 47# casing at @ 4200 TVD
4200 ft TVD/MD. Anticipated shoe LOT is
8 ½”X 5” DP
14.8 ppge. ACF- 0.0459 bbl/ft
Management has indicated TD should be

reached with the following KT parameters:
Drill 8 ½” Hole
KV = 5 bbl and KI = 0.5 ppg. to 9800’ TVD
Does the well plan meet management
objectives?
1. Use the formula below to calculate the maximum TVD for a planned hole section
that can be drilled with a given KI and KV target.
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2
=
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 + 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 + 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
0.0459 × 14.8 × 14.8 − 13.0 × 42002

𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
13.0 + 0.5 × 13.0 − 1.98 × 5 + 0.5 × 0.0459 × 14.8 × 4200
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 9,938 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
2. Use the formula below to calculate the Kick Tolerance (KV) for a given KI. (For
Example: What is the KV for a 0.5 ppg KI at planned TD?)
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 − 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇

𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 =
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 + 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
0.0459 × 14.8 × 4200 × 14.8 − 13.0 × 4200 − 0.5 × 9800

𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = = 5.2 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
13.0 + 0.5 × 13.0 − 1.98 × 9800

6 76
Design Kick Tolerance - continued

3. Use the formula below to calculate the minimum LOT required to meet the TD
objective and have a KT of KI=0.5 ppg and KV=5 bbl.
Where:
𝑎𝑎 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2 = 0.0459 × 42002 = 809676.00
𝑏𝑏 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 + 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
b = 0.0459 × 42002 × 13.0 + 0.0459 × 4200 × 9800 × 0.5 = 11470410.00
𝑐𝑐 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 + 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
c = 5 × 13.0 + 0.5 × 13.0 − 1.98 × 9800 = 7289730.00

𝑏𝑏 + 𝑏𝑏 2 + 4 × 𝑎𝑎 × 𝑐𝑐
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
2 × 𝑎𝑎
11470410 + 114704102 + 4 × 809676 × 7289730
= = 14.77 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2 × 809676
4. Use the formula below to calculate the maximum MW (pore pressure) required
to drill to TD objective and have a KT specified as KI=0.5 ppg and KV=5.0 bbl.
Where:
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × (𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝑊𝑊𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 ) + 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2
𝑎𝑎 =
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 − 𝑊𝑊𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 2 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 2
𝑏𝑏 =
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
9800 × 5.0 × 0.5 − 2.0 + 14.8 × 0.046 × 42002
𝑎𝑎 = = 243.59
9800 × 5.0
9800 × 0.5 × 14.8 × 4200 × 0.046 − 2.0 × 5.0 − 0.046 × 14.82 × 42002
𝑏𝑏 = = 3342.37
9800 × 5.0
𝑎𝑎 𝑎𝑎 2
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = − + + 𝑏𝑏
2 2
2
243.59 243.59
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = − + + 3342.37 = 13.02 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2 2

6 77
Version 1.3
Tenet 10

7 PROCEDURES
that affect procedures and equipment.”

“Always involve the right people in decisions
778- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 7 - Well Control Procedures
Trapped Pressure Check

Identify After Initial Shut-in

Pressure can be trapped in the well by:

• Shutting in with pumps still running and
poor choke manipulation.
• Attempting to bump the float.
• Migrating gas after initial shut-in.
Consequences of trapped pressure include:
• Improper shut-in pressure recordings.
• Formation breakdown and / or pipe light
conditions.
How to Remove
Bleed very small increments of mud (coffee
cups) from the choke and verify that
pressure has reduced and stabilized.
SIDPP
SICP
Check After Kill To

Confirm Well is Dead
After the first circulation of the Driller’s

method, the shut in casing pressure and
shut in drill pipe pressure should both be
equal to the initial SIDPP (plus any trapped
pressure). If both are equal but higher than
the SIDPP value then a Trapped Pressure
Check should be conducted. This should
also be done after circulating kill mud
weight around to confirm well is dead.
Always be aware that excessive bleeding

may allow additional influx.

7 79
Bump The Float (BTF)

DPP
Procedure CP
1. If not previously done, mark the SICP

value on the choke panel gauge to
represent the initial stabilized SICP value.
2. Line up to pump OMW into the drill
string.
3. Pump as slowly as possible into the drill
string with well and choke closed. (Use
cement pump if available at ¼ bbl per
min.)
Drill string
4. The drill pipe pressure will increase Float
continuously pressuring the string up to
open the float. Watch closely for an
increase in casing pressure as mud in the Kick
Influx
annulus becomes pressured (after the
float has opened).
5. When the casing pressure increase is
noted, stop the pump and record the
new CP and the “trapped” pressure
increase.
6. Read the drill pipe pressure and subtract the
trapped pressure slowly from the casing gauge. Record the value
as the SIDPP. Tapped pressure or SF
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − (𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 )
7. Bleed trapped pressure from casing pressure if desired.
Consider leaving some residual “trapped” pressure to use as the Safety

Factor for the well kill.
At times, people confuse the increase in casing pressure due to pumping

with gas migrating in the well. Usually gas migration is not an issue since
bumping the float should only take a short amount of time.

7 80
Bring Pump Up To Speed (BPUTS) for Surface BOP

900
ICP
800
500
Example:
SICP
SIDPP from BTF = 250 psi
400 Original SICP = 400 psi
Drill Pipe Casing
Desired Kill Rate = 30 spm
30 DPP Value = 900 psi
Safety Margin 100 psi
SPM Choke Position
0024
Pump % Open % Closed
Strokes
Open Close
1. As the pump comes on line the Choke Operator should crack open the choke
as needed to maintain casing pressure at the Original SICP value (plus any
desired Safety Margin). Choke Operator should provide constant feedback to
the Driller as to the progress.
2. Use choke to control CP constant until DP pressure has stabilized @ the kill
pump rate. Read and record this drill pipe pressure as the BPUTS Value.
3. Determine the Initial Circulating Pressure (ICP) and mark this on the Choke
Panel Gauge for reference.
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 900 − 100 = 800 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 800 − 250 = 550 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Note: Bring Pump To Off (BPTO) is done to shut down the mud pump (at any
time) during well control operations. BPTO is done the same way as BPUTS,
but pump rate is slowly reduced to zero while casing pressure held constant.

7 81
Establishing Correct ICP

The choke panel

gauge readings for
SICP
400 a shut–in well are
Drill Pipe Casing
shown here. (Float
0
not yet bumped,
SPM and SICP = 400 psi)
Choke Position
00000
Strokes
Open Close
The float is bumped and the SIDPP obtained. Pumps are started and
brought up to the desired rate while choke pressure is held constant.
After which, the resulting pressures are shown below :
(DP pressure = 900 psi and Casing pressure = 500 psi).
What is the correct ICP?
The casing pressure

is 100 psi above ICP
the original shut in 800 900
value of 400 psi.

This means the 500
well is 100 psi SICP
400
overbalanced. The
Drill Pipe Casing
correct DP pressure 30
needed to balance SPM Choke Position
the formation
00046
pressure (the ICP)
Pump % Open
is 800 psi and Strokes
% Closed
marked on the Open Close

gauge as such.

7 82
Use CP To Guide Adjustments To The DP Pressure

3rd Then Wait and Check for

Desired ICP = 800
900
500
1st Open Choke to Drop

2nd Choke Pressure to 400
Note DP pressure is
Drill Pipe Casing
100 psi too high. 30
SPM Choke Position
0038
Strokes
Open Close
Use the surface casing pressure to help manage DP

pressure when making adjustments with the choke.
For example: If drill pipe pressure (as noted above) is

100 psi too high, open the choke and allow the casing
pressure to reduce by 100 psi. Then wait for the DP
gauge to reflect the change after the lag time
(approximate 2 second per 1000 ft of well measured
depth). Do the opposite if the DP pressure is too low.
Learning how to “drive” the choke controls helps

prevent the “windshield wiper” effect on the DP
pressure gauge.

7 83
Driller’s Method (DM)

The Driller’s Method is a 2 circulation well kill procedure.

1. First circulation removes the influx (using OMW)
2. Second circulation displaces OMW with KMW
Two Rules of the Driller’s Method:

1. Hold casing pressure constant (surface BOP) or kill line pressure constant
(subsea BOP) while BPUTS.
2. Hold the pressure constant on the side of the U-tube that has constant fluid
density.
These two rules work regardless of drill string geometry or wellbore deviation.
First Circulation
ICP + Safety Margin
1. BTF and obtain SIDPP.
2. Using Original Mud Weight Fluid,
BPUTS to desired Kill Rate holding
casing pressure constant and establish
ICP. Mark the ICP on Choke Panel. Influx
Exiting Choke
3. Maintain DP pressure constant at the
ICP (plus desired safety margin) value
until all influx is circulated from the
well. Conduct a dynamic check: the Original
circulating CP should be at or nearly MW
equal to the original SIDPP if all influx is
removed.
4. BPTO (stop the pump) holding casing
pressure constant. Conduct a static
check: the SIDPP and SICP should be
equal and both should be at or near the
original SIDPP value (plus the safety
margin used).
5. Prepare or have available Kill Mud
Weight fluid.

7 84
Driller’s Method (DM) - continued

Second Circulation
1. BPUTS holding casing pressure constant

using Kill Mud Weight fluid to the
desired Kill Rate. DP pressure should be
K MW equal to the original ICP established in
the First Circulation.
2. Calculate the drill string capacity.
3. Maintain Casing Pressure Constant as
the KMW is circulated down the drill
string.
NOTE: It is critical that the annulus is
clear of gas if casing pressure is held
constant. If a clean annulus is in
question, a DP Pressure Schedule
should be developed and followed to
ensure correct BHP.
4. When Kill Mud Weight fluid begins exiting the drill string, note and record
the Drill Pipe Pressure (less any Safety Factor) as the Final Circulating
Pressure (FCP). Maintain the drill pipe pressure at the FCP value (plus
desired Safety Factor) until KMW returns to the surface.
5. BPTO (stop the pump) holding casing pressure constant. Conduct a static
check: SICP and SIDPP should be zero and the well dead (trapped pressure,
if any, will show on both SIDPP and SICP).
Advantages of the Driller’s Method

• Circulation can be started right away if necessary
• Allows removing the influx from the well even if weighting materials or
means of increasing the mud weight are insufficient
• Minimizes the effect/chance for gas migration
• First and Second Circulations are simple to execute without calculations

7 85
Driller’s Method Pressure Profiles

Driller’s Method (1st circulation)

ICP
Pressure →
DP psi
Casing psi
Shoe psi
SICP X
SIDPP X
BPUTS To Bit To Shoe Gas @ Bottoms

Surface Up
Pump Strokes →
Driller’s Method (2nd circulation)
DP psi
Pressure →
Casing psi
ICP
Shoe psi
FCP
SIDPP XX
To Bit To Shoe Bottoms Up Total Circ
Pump Strokes →
7 86
Wait & Weight Method (W&W)

The Wait and Weight Method gets it’s name from

the fact that there is a ”waiting” time while the mud
weight is increased or ”weighted up” prior to

circulating the influx from the hole. The well is shut-
in and an accurate SIDPP obtained by bumping the
float. Care should be taken not to include “trapped” KMW
pressure into the SIDPP value used to determine the
Kill Mud Weight (KMW).
While increasing the active mud weight to the KMW
value, construct a drill pipe pressure reduction OMW
schedule. The schedule will be used as the drill string
is “killed” and the influx is circulated up the annulus.
If the influx is gas, the casing pressure will need to
increase due to the gas expansion. The drill pipe
pressure reduction schedule must be followed during
this time.
Once kill mud weight is circulated to the bit, the DP is
maintained constant (Final Circulating Pressure) until KMW returns to the
surface. At this point the well should be dead.
Generally, the well can be killed in one complete circulation. However, since it is
recommended to use a mud weight that balances formation pressure, additional
circulating time will be required to increase the mud weight by a suitable safety
factor prior to returning to normal operations.
The W&W Method only has application for underbalanced kicks requiring a MW
increase.
Advantages of the W &W Method
• Pressures exerted in the wellbore will generally be lower than that for the
Driller’s Method. This difference is most significant for gas kicks
• The maximum pressure exerted on the shoe (or weak point in the open hole)
will normally be lower thus reducing the risk of mud loss
(Assuming: Voldrillstring<Annular Vol beneath shoe)
• The well and well control equipment will be under pressure for less time

7 87
Wait & Weight Method (W&W)-continued

Procedure : Example SIDPP = 250 psi

SCR=550 psi @ 30 spm
1. Calculate KMW value and begin weighting up SICP = 250 psi

active system to KMW. Have sufficient supply to
maintain a complete circulation of KMW.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = + 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 KMW
250 12.6 ppg
= + 12.0 = 12.6 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 8000
2. Calculate ICP, FCP, strokes to bit, and complete a
Drill Pipe Pressure Schedule. OMW
12.0 ppg
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 250 + 550 = 800 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 12.6
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = × 550~580 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 Pump Stks
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 12
To Bit
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 1200 stks
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = = 1200 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠s
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
TVD/TMD=8000 ft
DP Pressure Schedule
a. Calculate the drop in drill pipe pressure per pump stroke to bit.
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 800 − 580
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = = = 0.1833 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 1200
b. Select a Pump Stroke Increment (typically 100 stks per increment) and
calculate the DP Pressure Reduction per Pump Stroke Increment.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 100 × 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 100 × 0.1833 = 18 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
c. Calculate the DPP Increments (DPPI) per Strokes to Bit Schedule.
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷1 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 782 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷2 = 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 − 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = 764 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 … … 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒.
Pump DP pressure Pump DP pressure

Strokes Strokes
0 ICP=800 500 710
100 DPPI1=782 600 692
200 DPPI2=764
300 746
400 728 StB=1200 FCP=580
DP Pressure Schedule
7 88
Pressure →
SICP X
Version 1.3
SIDPP X
ICP
To Bit
FCP
To Shoe
Surface
W & W Method
Pump Strokes →

Gas to Bottoms Up
Wait & Weight Method Pressure Profiles
DP psi
Shoe psi
Casing psi
Total Circ
7 89
7 - Well Control Procedures
- 12
Wait & Weight Method: High Angle/Horizontal Well

SIDPP
Corrected DP Pressure Schedule
The Drill Pipe Pressure Schedule should be
corrected for high angle / horizontal
SICP
wellbores. Significant deviation changes
such as Kick Off Points (KOP) and End Of
Build (EOB) sections should be noted and
the DP pressure at the corresponding
KOPVD, & KOPMD
measured depth (pump strokes) should be
used to create the DPP schedule.
EOBVD, & EOBMD
Note:
The circulating pressures and pump strokes
should be scaled linearly between each
TVD / TMD significant directional change s (KOPs &
EOBs) in the well path. Recommended to
use for high angle (>35 degrees) wells.
Required Calculations:
For a well having the following directional data:
KOP (Vertical Depth, Measured Depth) and EOB (Vertical Depth, Measured Depth)
The determinations of KMW, ICP, and FCP are the same as shown before. The
following additional calculations would need to be made when constructing the
DPP Schedule.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑃𝑃 @ 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 + −
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆) × 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑃𝑃 @ 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 + −
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
Note: For increased accuracy when calculating the drill string volume and
corresponding strokes, use the drill string IDs associated with any tapered strings
(if used). The strokes to bit and the corresponding strokes to KOP, and to EOB,
should be included in the DPP Schedule.
Strokes DP Pressure Strokes DP Pressure Strokes DP Pressure
0 ICP Stk to KOP DPP@KOP Stk to EOB DPP@EOB
Stk to KOP DPP@KOP Stk to EOB DPP@EOB Stk to Bit FCP
Corrected DP Pressure Schedule

7 90
Volumetric Method
The objective of the Volumetric Method is to maintain BHP

relatively constant as a gas influx migrates up the wellbore when

circulation below the influx is not possible.
Instances where the VM may be required include:

• Plugged Drill string
• Off Bottom
• Pumps inoperative
• Packed off below kick
• Out of hole
Considerations for Volumetric Method

Surface Requirements
• Ability to measure small amounts of mud from the choke manifold.
• Ability to make small casing pressure adjustments with the choke.
Subsea Operations
• Recommend using Volumetric Control until gas reaches the BOP (monitor
KLP and CP) then use Dynamic Volumetric/Lubrication Procedure.
Note Concerning Various Well Configurations:

When bleeding volume from the well, the ACF for the section of hole
where the gas is expanding should be used to calculate the bleed
volumes for a particular cycle. However, it is difficult to know precisely
where the gas bubble is as it moves up the well. For most wells use of
the uppermost ACF is a conservative solution. However, for wells having
significantly tapered strings: (1) use the ACF and/or MI increment for
the lower section for the first one or two cycles and then switch to the
upper annular MI value or (2) select a relatively high Safety Factor value
and use the upper ACF and/or MI value.

7 91
Volumetric Method - continued

Procedure : Example A
Initial SICP = 200 psi
Now =320 psi and rising (OB = 120 psi)

Pit Gain = 7 bbls
30 MISICP=2574 psi
20 40
10 50
9 ⅝” x 5”
ACF=0.0489 bbl/ft 0 60
Mud Weight
10.5 ppg Trip Tank
9 5/8 @ 11,000’
LOT = 15.0 ppge
P gas
15,000’ TVD/MD
1. Check the MISICP value and select a Safety Factor (SF). (Since the SICP of 200
psi is significantly less than the MISCIP of 2574 psi, a SF of 100 psi is acceptable.
Additionally, this well does not qualify for special treatment concerning the
annular geometry.)
2. Check the MISICP and select a Pressure Increment (PI). (Since the SICP of 200
psi is significantly less than the MISCIP of 2574 psi, a PI of 100 psi is
acceptable.)
3. Calculate Mud Increment using the uppermost ACF value.
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 100 × 0.0489
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = = = 9.0 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 0.052 × 10.5
4. Allow CP to increase by the SF and PI to:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶1 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 200 + 100 + 100 = 400 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
5. Bleed mud from well while maintaining casing pressure constant at CP1 until
the Mud Increment (MI) has been bled back.
6. Close choke and allow CP to increase by the PI to:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶2 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶1 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 400 + 100 = 500 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

7 92

8. Repeat steps 6 & 7 until casing pressure stops increasing and remains
constant, which indicates that all gas is at the surface, or until a preferred
circulating method can be implemented.
Schedule: Example A
800
Casing Pressure (psi) →
CP3= 600 psi

600
CP2= 500 psi
CP1= 400 psi PI = 100 psi

400
PI = 100 psi
SF = 100 psi
200
0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0

Volume Bled (bbls) →
8700
8600
Bottomhole 8500
Pressure 8400
8300
8200
0 9.0 18.0 27.0 36.0
Volume Bled (bbls) →

(Based on Example Well Data Shown)

7 93


Now = 820 psi and rising
Example B
30
20 40 This well has a long liner
section which requires
10 50
additional consideration
0 60 concerning the MI
calculation and the selection
Trip Tank of an appropriate Safety
Factor.
9⅝
11,000’ Well Data: Kick Info:
14,403 ft
MW = 14.5 ppg = 0.754 psi /ft SIDPP = 140 psi
SICP = 700 psi
5” DP x over to 3½” DP @ 10600’ Pit Gain = 15 bbl
7” 9 ⅝ @ 11,000’ TVD/TMD MISICP = 2808 psi
18,000’ 7” Liner @ 18,000’ TVD/TMD
TOL @ 10750’ TVD (LOT=17.5 ppge) Annulus packed-
P gas 6” Open Hole 18,000’– 22000’ off above bit. Kick
is migrating
TD – 22,000’ TVD/TMD 9⅝” X 5”ACF = 0.0489 bbl/ft above pack-off.
6” Open Hole Diameter 7” X 3½” ACF = 0.0241 bbl/ft
6” X 3½” ACF = 0.0230 bbl/ft
Procedure: Example B
1. Consider MISICP and select a Safety Factor (SF). For this case, the gas location
will be tracked as the influx migrates up the hole so each ACF will be
considered. (For this example the SF = 200 psi).
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 200 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2. Consider MISICP and select a Pressure Increment (PI). (For this example the
PI = 200 psi).
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 200 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
3. Calculate the Mud Increment (MI) for each annular section.
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑊𝑊

7 94

200 × 0.0230
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂×3½" = = 6.1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.052 × 14.5
200 × 0.0241
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿×3½" = = 6.4 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.052 × 14.5
200 × 0.0489
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀9⅝"×5" = = 13.0 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.052 × 14.5
4. Allow CP to increase by the SF and PI to:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶1 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 700 + 200 + 200 = 1100 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
5. Select and use the Mud Increment MI corresponding to the location of the gas
(neglect BHA):
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂×3½" = 6.1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
7. After each cycle, calculate the volume of gas (Vgas), pressure of gas (Pgas), and
top of gas bubble.
Note: If the influx volume is accurately known, these formulas can “track” the
location of the gas as it migrates up the hole. If the volume is not known then
skip this step and use the upper ACF and a “high” SF as discussed.
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 15 + 6.1 = 21.1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 × 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 =
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
15 × 16728
𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = = 11,891 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
21.1
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 − 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 −
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
16928 − 11891
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 22000 − = 15,320 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.754
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 +
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
21.1
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 15,320 − = 14,403 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.023
8. Close choke and allow CP to increase by PI to:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶2 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶1 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶2 = 1100 + 200 = 1300 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

7 95

9. Repeat steps 5, 6, 7, & 8 until casing pressure stops increasing and remains
constant, which indicates that all gas is at the surface, or until a preferred
circulating method can be implemented.
2000
CP5= 1900 psi
Casing Pressure (psi)→
1600 CP3= 1500 psi
1200 Schedule: Example B

CP2= 1300 psi
CP1= 1100 psi

800
400 Initial SICP = 700 psi
0 10.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 50.0 60.0

6.1 12.5 25.5 38.5 51.5 64.5
Volume Bleed (bbl)→

7 96

Cycles CP ACF Vol Cum BHP Vol P L Top of

psi Bleed Vol Gas Gas Gas Gas
1 M 1100 0.023 0 0 17128 15.0 16728 652 20817

B 1100 0.023 6.1 6.1 16928 21.1 11891 917 14403
2 M 1300 0.0241 0 6.1 17128 21.1 11891 876 14179

B 1300 0.0241 6.4 12.5 16928 27.5 9127 1141 10512
3 M 1500 0.0489 0 12.5 17128 27.5 9127 562 10826

B 1500 0.0489 13.0 25.5 16928 40.5 6201 827 6946
4 M 1700 0.0489 0 25.5 17128 40.5 6201 827 6681

B 1700 0.0489 13.0 38.5 16928 53.4 4696 1093 4684
5 M 1900 0.0489 0 38.5 17128 53.4 4696 1093 4419

B 1900 0.0489 13.0 51.5 16928 66.4 3779 1358 3202
6 M 2100 0.0489 0 51.5 17128 66.4 3779 1358 2937

B 2100 0.0489 13.0 64.5 16928 79.4 3161 1623 2118
7 M 2300 0.0489 0 64.5 17128 79.4 3161 1623 1853

B 2300 0.0489 13.0 77.5 16928 92.3 2717 1888 1264
8 M 2500 0.0489 0 77.5 17128 92.3 2717 1888 999

B 2500 0.0489 13.0 90.5 16928 105.3 2382 2154 555
9 M 2700 0.0489 0 90.5 17128 105.3 2382 2154 290

B 2700 0.0489 13.0 103.5 16928 118.3 2120 2419 0
M-Migrate
B-Bleed Data From Example Well B

7 97

Note:
The time spent bleeding during the first “cycle” is normally the longest. Each
successive bleed would be shorter and shorter.
The initial size of the influx relative to the calculated MI for that annular section,
dictates the cycle times. For this example, the if the original volume of the influx
was 5 bbl (instead of the 15), the calculated MI of 6.1 bbl for the first bleed, would
have the influx half-way up the well during the first bleed cycle (Influx size more
than doubled).
For the example given, if the influx was migrating at a rate of 750 ft per hour,
would require 9 hours to bleed the 6.1 bbl (bottom of gas migrates from 22,000 ft
to 15,320 ft).
Influx Migration rate can be calculated by:

𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 (𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 / ℎ𝑟𝑟)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅(𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 / ℎ𝑟𝑟) =
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 (𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 / 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)
To track the location of the gas as it migrates up the hole while implementing the
Volumetric Procedure, the following diagram can be used to determining the
bottom of the gas.
Gas
Pressure
HP of Mud Beneath Bubble
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑃𝑃𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
Relationship After Each Bleed

7 98
Lube and Bleed Procedure

Lube and Bleed Method is used to lower

From surface pressure while keeping BHP
Trip Tank
900 psi within design limits . This is accomplished

through the addition of mud (HP) & the
removal of gas (surface pressure). The
method is used when:
Ann Cap
• Gas is at surface and CP is constant
0.046 bbl/ft • Circulation below the influx is not
possible.
Shoe MISICP
5200’ 1433 psi
Surface Equipment Requirements
LOT
15.5 ppg 1. Access to well via kill line.
2. Accurate measuring tank (Trip or
MW Stripping Tank).
10.2 ppg
3. High pressure, low displacement mud
pump.
Plugged Bit
4. Choke manifold that will allow for
small changes in CP to be made by the
choke operator.
5. CP Gauge that can measure small
Procedure | Example increments of pressure.
1. Pump Original Mud Weight (OMW) into the well and increase the CP by a
small, predetermined amount (recommend 50-100 psi). Accurately measure
the amount of mud that was added to the well coinciding with the change in
CP. Determine the initial gas volume & initial gas height using:
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 × 𝑉𝑉𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
Using the example wellbore above, pumps were kicked in and the CP was
increased by 100 psi (from SICP of 900 psi to the CPlube value of 1000 psi). Trip
tank shows this change in CP took 7 bbls of 10.2 ppg mud (OMW).
𝑉𝑉𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 70 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔

ℎ𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 1522 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔

7 99
Lube & Bleed - continued

2. Determine the Lube Mud Weight (LMW) to be used. Options for LMW range
from Original Mud Weight (OMW) to Kill Mud Weight (KMW). If a well top kill is
desired, calculate the minimum LMW required using:
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = + 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝)
0.052 ∗ ℎ 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 10.2 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 0.5304 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ⁄𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 13. 4 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 0.6968 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Note: Because the calculated LMWTop Kill MW was greater than the OMW, it is an
indication that the well is underbalanced; pumping OMW in this case will not kill
the well.
Note: Gas Weight assumed to be 2.0 ppg (0.104 psi/ft) in this example when
calculating LMWKMW
3. Calculate the hydrostatic pressure per barrel for the OMW, the selected LMW,
and for the assumed Gas Weight.
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 (𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ⁄𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 =
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏⁄𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓)
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 11.53 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 15.14 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 ⁄𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 2.26 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 /𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
4. Calculate Initial Maximum Allowable Annular Surface Pressure (MAASPi).
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑃𝑃𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑖𝑖 = 0.052 × 15.5 × 5200 − 0.052 × 10.2 × (5200 − 1522) − 0.104
× 1522
= 4191 − 1951 − 158 = 2082 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
5. Select a Safety Factor (SF) and a Pressure Increment (PI) based on MAASPi.
Because the initial CPlube of 1000 psi is significantly less than the Initial MAASPi
of 2082 psi, a SF of 100 psi and a PI of 200 psi are reasonable to select
6. Calculate the Over Balance (OB) added and adjust (bleed) casing pressure to the
desired CP bleed value (Prior to each bleed, allow sufficient time for the lubed
mud to fall through the gas).
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 − 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 7 × 11.53 + 100 + 0 ≅ 181 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 181 − 100 = 81 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 1000 − 81 = 919 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 100 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝)
7100
Lube & Bleed - continued

7. Calculate the new MAASP.

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 × 𝑉𝑉𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
Note: Ignoring the Gas HP yields a more conservative MAASP, and that is what is
shown here.
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 11.53 × 7 ≅ 81 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 = 2082 − 81 = 2001 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
8. Check MAASPNew and lubricate mud into the well until the CP increases by the PI.
Measure the volume of mud pumped from the trip tank. (For this Cycle: Trip tank
shows the well took 11.3 bbl of 13.4 ppg LMW Top Kill MW to increase the CP from
the CP Bleed value of 919 psi to the CP Lube value of 1119 psi.
9. Calculate the HP added.
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 × 𝑉𝑉𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
= 15.14 × 11.3 = 171 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
10. Bleed gas from the well and decreases casing pressure to the desired value.
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 = 11.3 × 15.15 + 200 + 100 ≅ 471 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 471 − 100 = 371 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 1119 − 371 = 748 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 100 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝)
11. Repeat Step 7, 8, 9, & 10 until all gas has been removed from the well.
Lube MAASP Casing Lube Vol HP Vol

Cycles Bleed To Lube Add Gas(70)
1 2082 SICP=900 1000 7 81 63
2 2001 919 1119 11.3 171 51.7
3 1831 749 949 10.9 165 40.9
4 1666 584 784 10.4 158 30.5
5 1508 426 626 9.7 147 20.8
6 1360 278 478 8.7 131 12.2
7 1229 147 347 6.9 105 5.3
8 1124 42 242 4.2 64 ~
0 Bled casing to zero, filled hole

w/13.4 ppg

7101
Lube and Bleed (WO/CO)

Lube and bleed can be difficult in a

WO/CO operation due to the well losing
fluid to open perforations. The following

method of Lube & Bleed can be used in
this situation. Initial SICP
Gas Influx
250 psi
30 bbl
Pre-requisites for achieving success are:
1. Lube Fluid Weight = Fluid Weight in
wellbore ACF
2. Single bubble @ surface 0.0613 bbl/ft
3. HP of gas negligible
CO Brine
10.4 ppg
Procedure : Example
9 5/8” N80
47# Casing
1. Lubricate original weight fluid into 0.0732 bbl/ft
the annulus to increase the initial Burst = 6870 psi
casing pressure (P1) by a desired
margin (PM). The new CP is now P2.
Select PM=100 psi for this example.
Top Perfs
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑃𝑃1 = 250 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 9,800 ft
Bottom Perfs
P2 = 250+100=350 psi 10,000 ft
2. Allow time for the lube fluid to fall Formation
through the gas and for the casing Pressure Grad = 0.5408 psi/ft
pressure to stabilize. For this Frac Grad = 0.728 psi/ft
example, P2 stabilized at 320 psi.
Lube & Bleed WO/CO Example
3. Calculate the P3 value and bleed gas
from the choke to reduce casing
pressure from P2 to the calculated P3 Lube Value
value.
𝑃𝑃1 2
𝑃𝑃3 =
𝑃𝑃2 P2
2502
𝑃𝑃3 = = 195 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑃𝑃1 2
320 P1 𝑃𝑃3 =
𝑃𝑃2
Bleed casing pressure from 320 psi
to the new P1 value of 195 psi. Initial CP
4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 until
P3
completed as shown in diagram to
the right. Bleed Value

7102
Stripping with Volumetric Control

IBOP Requirements
• Proper equipment line up (able to bleed
FOSV small volumes through choke and into a

calibrated trip tank)
• Installation of a full opening safety valve
(FOSV) and an inside BOP.
• “Pipe Heavy” conditions
Consideration
N2
Surge Adjust annular closing pressure and use
Bottle a surge bottle installed on the annular
hydraulic closing line to prevent element
wear. Grease or oil on pipe helps
prevent wear as well.
Manual (or Hydraulic) Have Contingencies For:

Choke
 Good communication
throughout
 Stuck pipe
 High pressures
Calibrated  Wear on annular element
Trip Tank  Wellbore bridges
Factors that can affect well pressures when stripping:

Compression - fluids can be compressed as pipe is lowered into shut-in well..
Influx penetration – elongates the influx, resulting in additional hydrostatic
pressure loss when bleeding mud from the well.
Gas migration and expansion - must be accounted for and controlled properly.
Under-bleeding - not bleeding sufficient volume can result in added wellbore
pressures.
Over-bleeding – bleeding excessive volume can result in possible underbalance.
Artificial migration - once pipe has penetrated the influx, additional pipe
stripped will displace the influx up the hole.
Restored overbalance – returning the drill string to bottom and the pipe filled
with original MW restores the original overbalance (if any) on the well.

7103
Stripping with Volumetric Control (continued)

SICP - 120 psi

Example: MW
30 stands off bottom 12.0 ppg
MISICP
Pit Gain ~ 20 bbls 1092 psi
5” 19.50 Grade G pipe:
8 ½” Hole Size, 660 ft of 6” BHA
9 5/8” 47.0 Casing (ID = 8.681”)
ACF 0.05 bbl/ft
Notes: 9 5/8” @ 6000 ft

 The pipe should be lowered LOT – 15.5 ppg
slowly (30-45 ft/min).
 Floor-men to remove burrs from ACF 0.047 bbl/ft
tool joints and paste with
lubricant.
ACF 0.035 bbl/ft
 Pipe should be filled from the
inside BOP to the surface
regularly. ACF 0.07 bbl/ft
Stand Length = 93 ft
Procedure : Example
1. Bump The Float (BTF) and measure the SIDPP to determine influx location.
SIDPP=SICP ...Influx Below Bit
SIDPP<SICP but≠ 0 ...Above and/or Below Bit
SIDPP= 0 ...Influx Above The Bit (if well not originally underbalanced).
Example – SIDP = 120 psi, indicating influx below bit.
2. Check MISICP and select Safety Factor (SF), Pressure Increment (PI), and
calculate closed end pipe displacement and the mud increment (MI).
MISICP=1092 psi 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 100 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 100 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 2
𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = = 0.0243 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏/𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 → 2.25 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏/𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
1029.4
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 100 × 0.05
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = = = 8.0 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 0.052 × 12
3. If influx is below the bit, the influx will be penetrated. When penetrated, the
gas bubble will expand while bleeding mud from the well. This reduction in
hydrostatic pressure (HP penetration) may result in the well going underbalanced.
To compensate for this, calculate the maximum height of the gas with BHA on
bottom and compare it to the height of the gas with the BHA above the influx.

7104

For the first few stands

stripped, the well may be

“overbalanced” by the sum
of (SF+ PI + Pinflux) until the
influx is penetrated. When
back on bottom the well HP penetration
571 ft
should only be
overbalanced by the Safety
Factor (and to some 286 ft
degree the PI if gas

migration takes place).
Influx Penetration
The differential between the hydrostatic values can be added as a Safety Factor
prior to starting the stripping operation. This loss of HP due to bubble
penetration is necessary to compensate for this effect. If influx is above the bit
then disregard the HPpenetration.
𝐻𝐻𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = (ℎ 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − ℎ 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏) × 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
20 20
ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = 286 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = = 571 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.07 0.035
𝐻𝐻𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 571 − 286 × 0.052 × 12.0 − 1.9 = 150 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

4. Strip pipe into the shut-in well (without bleeding mud) until casing pressure
increases by the SF, PI, and HP penetration to CPStrip1 .
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 +𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝑃𝑃𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 120 + 100 + 100 + 150 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 = 470 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
It took 28 ft of 1st stand (93 ft per stand) to increase casing pressure to CPStrip 1.
5. Crack the choke open and bleed mud from the well while holding casing
pressure constant at CP Strip1 until the cumulative mud bled less closed-end pipe
displacement is equal to the mud increment (MI).
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 − 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
Maintain casing pressure constant at 470 psi for the remaining 65 ft of 1st stand
and additional stands until the total volume bled minus total volume stripped
equals to 8 bbl.
7105

6. When the target MI is reached, close the choke and continue stripping without
bleeding until the casing pressure (CP) increases by the PI to CPStrip2 (or CPStrip3,
etc.).
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 470 + 100 = 570 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until drill string returned to bottom.
Example Problem (Displayed on a Stripping Worksheet)

# End Vol Total Vol Total Tot Bled
– Tot Strip
Stnds CP Bled Bled Strip Strip
0 120 0 0 0 0 0
0.5 470 0 0 0 0 0
1 470 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 0
2 470 2.2 3.3 2.3 3.4 0
3 470 2.3 5.6 2.3 5.7 0
4 470 2.7 8.3 2.3 8.0 0.3
↓ ↓ 20.0 28.3 13.5 21.5 6.8
11 470 2.8 31.1 2.3 23.8 7.3
11.5 470 1.8 32.9 1.1 24.9 8.0 MI 1
12 570 0 0 0 0 0
13 570 3.1 3.1 2.3 2.3 .8
↓ ↓ 32.0 35.1 27.0 29.3 5.8
26 570 2.8 37.9 2.3 31.6 6.3
26.5 570 2.9 40.8 1.2 32.8 8.0 MI 2
27 670 0 0 0 0 0
28 670 3.7 3.7 2.3 2.3 1.4
29 670 3.8 7.5 2.3 4.6 2.9
30 670 3.7 11.2 Note: On bottom (Well is ~164
psi OB due to SF + 36% of MI
still in well)

7106
Bullheading (BH): General Procedure

Procedure & Considerations

1. Calculate the required density and volume to bullhead. For

density use TVD of top perfs; for volume use TVD of bottom perfs.
2. Calculate the surface pressure limitations and create a schedule of
surface pressure limitations vs. volume bullheaded (pumped).
3. Pressure test all equipment.
4. Bring the pumps up to speed to overcome the well pressure and
establish injectivity. Pump the kill fluid down either the annulus
and / or tubing / drill string. Monitor pump pressure and volume
pumped during the operation. (If gas is already present at the
surface, the Lube and Bleed Technique can be used to eliminate
the gas or to lower surface pressure before starting the
bullheading operation).
5. Regulate pump speed so that the surface pressure limits are not
exceeded. For BH to be successful, pump fast enough to exceed
the rate at which gas may be migrating. As the produced fluids are
forced back into the formation, the added hydrostatic pressure
should lower the surface pressure.
6. When sufficient volume has been pumped, stop the pump (unless
an over-displacement was approved), shut in the well, and
monitor the shut-in pressure. Determine if well is still under-
balanced or if trapped pressure exists. If pressure is observed,
then the gas may have migrated up-hole faster than the fluid was
being pumped down hole, or the fluid density in the hole is not
sufficient to kill the well.

7107
Bullheading (WO/CO)
Static Shut In
Tubing Pressure
Workover (WO) Procedure : Example 2500 psi
WH rated
Calculations: WP limit = 4000 psi
1. Average Weight of Fluid in Tubing (WTF)
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 3 1/2” N80
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 9.3# Tubing
0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 0.0087 bbl/ft
0.45 × 9800 − 2500 Burst = 8640 psi
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑇𝑇 = = 3.75 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 9800
2. Kill Fluid Weight (KFW) 9 5/8” N80
47# Casing
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 0.0732 bbl/ft
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 +
0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 Burst = 6870 psi
2500
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 3.75 + = 8.7 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × 9800
Packer - 9300 ft
EOT - 9500 ft
(Continued on next page) Top Perfs
9,800 ft
Bottom Perfs
10,000 ft
Formation
Pressure Grad = 0.450 psi/ft
Frac Grad = 0.650 psi/ft
The controlling formula for calculating maximum bullheading

pumping pressure vs. the volume bullheaded is shown below:
0 psi
𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹:
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 − 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
0 psi
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡
Note: For critical situations, the friction pressure can be calculated
and added to MSP limits. See Appendix for applicable formula.

7108
Bullheading (WO/CO) - continued

3. Bullhead Volumes to EOT, to Top Perfs, and to Bottom Perfs (measured depths).
(Capacity factor of tubing = CF Tubing )
𝑉𝑉𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸

𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 0.0087 × 9500 = 83 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 × (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 )
𝑉𝑉𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 83 + 0.0732 × 9800 − 9500 = 83 + 22 = 105 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 × (𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 )
𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 83 + 0.0732 × 10000 − 9500 = 83 + 37 = 120 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
4. Determine Maximum Surface Pressure (MSP) limits: Initial, KFW @ EOT, KFW @
Top Perfs, and KFW @ Bottom Perfs.
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝑃𝑃𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 @ 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 0.65 × 9800 − 0.052 × 3.75 × 9800 = 4460 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝑃𝑃𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻@𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 =
= 0.65 × 9800 − 0.052 × 8.7 × 9500 − 0.052 × 3.75 × (9800 − 9500) = 2014 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 𝑃𝑃𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 = 0.65 × 9800 − 0.052 × 8.7 × 9800 = 1936 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 𝑃𝑃𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 0.65 × 10000 − 0.52 × 8.7 × 10000 = 1976 psi
5. Create pump pressure vs. volume pumped schedule.
Surface to EOT:
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = × 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
4460 − 2014
∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = × 5 = 147.3 ≅ 150 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
83
EOT to Top Perf:
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = × 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
2014 − 1936
∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = × 5 ≅ 18 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.0732 × (9800 − 9500)

7109

Top Perf to Bottom Perf:

∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 =
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
= × 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
1936 − 1976
∆𝑃𝑃 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 = × 5 ≅ −14 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 5 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.0732 × (10000 − 9800)
NOTE: Because the previous calculation is negative, the pressure limit with KFW
at the bottom perf reverts to a value equal to the pressure limit with KFW at the
top perf.
6. Pressure test all lines to at least maximum anticipated pressure.
7. Consider pressuring annulus to increase tubing burst, casing collapse limitation,

prevent packer unseating, and to monitor for communication and/or losses.
8. Bring the pump on slowly. Once injectivity is established, increase pump speed
without exceeding Maximum Surface Pressure Limits (MSPs) as per the
calculated schedule while KWF is bullheaded to bottom perf.
9. Monitor and record tubing and annulus pressures and volumes during the
procedure.
10. Shut down when calculated volume has been pumped.
11. Read and record shut-in surface pressures and determine if trapped pressure or
underbalance exists.

7110

5000 MSP Initial

WH pressure limit
4000
Surface Pressure (psi)
Fracture Zone
3000 MSP KFW@EOT
Bullhead Zone MSP KFW@TopPerfs
2000
Actual BH Pressure
1000
Flow Zone
82
105 120
20 40 60 80 100 120
This line can be calculated by Volume Bullheaded (bbl)

repeating Steps 4-8 but
replacing the Pfrac with pore
pressure (Pformation).
Formation fracture pressure may not always be the surface pressure

limitation. Surface pressure limitations that need checking for bullheading
down tubing and casing include:
• Tubing and casing burst rating (adjusted for condition)

• Wellhead or tree pressure rating
• BOPE pressure rating
• Pump pressure rating
• Casing collapse if communication exists

7111
Bullheading : Drilling
Bullheading is the practice of pumping into a shut-in well to force formation fluids
back into a reservoir or other permeable zone.
When to Bullhead SIDPP

• Influx displacement by conventional methods
SICP
may cause excessive surface pressures (i.e.,
exceeding MAASP might risk casing burst near Kill Line
the wellhead).
• Influx displacement by conventional methods
results in an excessive volume of gas at surface
conditions (i.e., a volume that may exceed the
mud/gas separator throughput limitation).
• Influx is suspected to contain an unacceptable
level of H2S or HPHT.
• A kick is taken with the pipe off-bottom, and it
is not feasible to strip back to bottom.
• An influx is taken with no pipe in the hole.
• To reduce surface pressures before Kick
implementing further well control operations Influx
(Mud Cap).
• Considered as the last resort when
conventional methods are not applicable.
Feasibility of Bullheading
• BOP, well-head (WH),surface pressure rating.

• The characteristics of the open hole. Low permeability may require fracturing
the formation or make bullheading impossible.
• The rated pressure of the well control equipment and the casing (make an
allowance for wear and deterioration).
• Drill pipe and casing pressure limits should be known and not exceeded.
• The type of influx and / or the position of influx in the hole.
• The quality of filter cake at the permeable formation.
• The consequences of fracturing the open-hole.
• The consequences of displacement of large volumes of drilling fluids into
potentially productive formations .
• Gas migration rate vs. pump delivery rate.
• High friction pressures in slim holes.
• Mud rheology and / or type and composition.
Note: The calculations for BH in open hole and cased hole applications are very
similar.
7112
Version 1.3
Tenet 8

8 COMPLICATIONS
“Always address abnormal conditions.”
8-
113
1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 8 - Complications
Complications During Well Control Operations

 Surface pressure exceeds MAASP

 Pump failure and changing pumps
 Plugged or washed out nozzles

 Plugged or washed out choke
• Washout or parting of drill string
• BOP equipment failure
• Excessive fluid losses
• Flow problems downstream of the choke
• Hydrates
• Choke operating system failure
• Gauge problems
• Annulus pack-off
Those indicated by a check are considered most likely.
Drill Pipe Casing

30
SPM Choke Position
0000
Strokes
Open Close
An emergency is defined as an event requiring immediate attention.

Similarly, the actions of the Choke Operator when responding to
complications that occur during a well control event also require an
immediate response. If not, well problems will only worsen and
become more costly to correct.
Usually, complications can be identified by changes in the casing and
drill pipe pressures when circulating during a well kill.
Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 8114

- 2
Surface Pressure Exceeds MAASP

ICP MAASP = 1211 psi The MISICP value is a Chevron term

OMW
and is only valid at initial shut-in. It is
10.5 ppg also valid (neglecting friction

pressures) when the influx is in the
open hole section beneath the casing
3000 ft 10.5 ppg KMW shoe.
600 ft 1.9 ppg Gas The MAASP or “Maximum Allowable

Annular Surface Pressure” is
dependent upon the hydrostatic
above the shoe and when circulating,
1600 ft 11.2 ppg KMW is ever changing and dynamic. It is
more uncertain for surface pressure
LOT = 14.2 ppg limits because the hydrostatic
Shoe @ 5200 ft
MISICP = 1000 psi
pressure and annular friction loss
values above the shoe may not be
known.
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 0.052 × 14.2 × 5200 = 3840 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
=3840 − 0.052 × 11.2 × 1600 − 0.052 × 1.9 × 600 − 0.052 × 10.5 × 3000
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 3840 − 932 − 59 − 1638 = 1211 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
Do Not OPEN the Choke If Casing Pressure

Approaches or Exceeds MAASP!
MAASP = 1211 psi

ICP
Even if a reliable value for 800 900
dynamic MAASP were available,
there is little to be gained by
knowing so. If CP rises to MAASP SICP
400
while circulating out a kick it is Drill Pipe Casing
more prudent to continue (even 30
if it causes down-hole fluid SPM Choke Position
losses) than it is to open the 0038
choke and allow additional influx. Pump % Open % Closed
Strokes
Open Close

- 3
Pump Failure & Changing Pumps

ICP
800 900
500
SICP
400
Drill Pipe Casing

30
SPM Choke Position

0038
Strokes
Open Close
Indicators of a failing mud pump are rotary hose

oscillations and erratic and dropping standpipe pressure.
During choke work, the indication would be a rapid drop

in both the drill pipe and casing pressure gauges.
Immediately stop the pump (holding CP constant if

possible) and shut-in the well. Switch over to the
auxiliary pump or cement unit and BPUTS holding casing
pressure (or KLP if subsea) constant.

- 4
Plugged Nozzle(s)
New ICP = 900 psi

ICP
800
500
Drill Pipe Casing

30
SPM Choke Position

0248
Strokes
Open Close
A sudden increase in drill pipe pressure with little to no choke

pressure change is the primary indicator of a plugged bit
nozzle. The temptation is to open the choke to reduce the DP
pressure but this would probably allow additional influx. The
best procedure is to stop the pump, shut-in the well, re-
establish correct shut-in pressures, and then BPUTS holding
casing pressure constant (or KLP when using Subsea BOP) and
obtain a “new” ICP. Pump rate may need to be reduced
depending on degree of plugging.
An alert choke operator may accomplish the same thing by

holding the choke pressure constant momentarily until the
standpipe pressure stabilizes at a new and higher value (may
want to reduce circulating rate). This new higher value is the
correct ICP and the remaining circulating pressure schedule
should be adjusted accordingly.

- 5
Choke Washout
1
ICP
Decreasing Choke Pressure
2 DrillDrop
Pipe in Drill Pipe Pressure Casing
Lagging
30
SPM Choke Position

0038
Strokes
Open Close
A choke is unlikely to suddenly “cut out”. So, there is usually not a dramatic
indication that this problem is occurring. Abrasive sands and high pressure gas
exiting the choke can wear the tungsten parts inside and the resulting wear acts
the same as if the choke operator was opening the choke.
This pressure drop is relatively slow and

worsens with time. The person operating
the choke can mistakenly continue to close
Abrasive
Influx
the choke to compensate for the loss of drill
Exiting Choke pipe pressure.
If this continues, it may become impossible

to maintain a suitable circulating pressure
even with the choke indicated to be fully
closed.
Whenever detected, the well should be shut

in and the back-up choke put into use (check
CP value for gauge consistency when
BPUTS).

- 6
String Washout
No loss of Choke Pressure

ICP
Unexpected Drop in Drill Pipe Pressure

Drill Pipe Casing
30
SPM Choke Position

0038
Strokes
Open Close
A string washout usually is indicated by a

loss of drill pipe pressure with the choke
pressure remaining relatively constant.
This pressure drop is relatively slow
since a washout is not instantaneous,
and usually worsens with time.
BHP can be excessively increased if the

choke operator closes the choke in an
attempt to maintain the drill pipe
pressure at the original value!
The correct procedure is to stop

circulating and shut the well in.
Prolonged circulation could lead to a
parted string.
If the washout is near the surface,

consider Volumetric Procedure or
Bullheading to control the well.

- 7
Attempting Off Bottom Well Kill

Take care when attempting a

circulation kill with the bit (or end of

string) not at or near the bottom of the
well.
Many times a bottoms-up using the

Driller’s Method may work when the
influx is above the bottom of the drill
string but the situation could be made
worse if attempted with any gas influx
beneath the circulating point.
If a gas influx migrates while Influx

circulating at constant DP pressure,
the BHP will decrease and allow
additional influx.
Shut in Drill Pipe Pressure and

Shut in Casing Pressure Equal
indicates the influx is below
the bit. Circulation will not
DP psi = Casing psi remove all the influx.
Shut in Drill Pipe Pressure less

than the Shut in Casing
Pressure would indicate the
influx is both below and above
DP psi < Casing psi the bit. Circulation will not
remove all the influx.
Shut in Drill Pipe Pressure equal

zero does not mean there is no
0 influx below the bit. The well may
still be “overbalanced” and any
DP psi Casing psi influx below the bit will not be
removed with circulation.

- 8
Version 1.3
Tenet 9

9 SUBSEA
high risk and unusual situations.”

“Always follow written procedures for
9121
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 9 - Subsea
Reduced Fracture Gradient in Deepwater

Well A Well B
Water Depth = 180’

Water Depth = 6500’
Well A and Well B

TVD Below ML = 1400’
Fracture models show that the fracture gradient is directly related to the
overburden weight at any depth of interest in a well. The overburden for an
offshore well will comprise of the water depth (having a weight of 8.5 ppg or so)
and the sediment weight below the mud line. At relatively shallow depths (BML)
the sediment would have an estimated gradient of 0.7 or so and the fracture
gradient would be nearly equal to that of the overburden.
Estimate the overburden gradient for Well A:

𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 0.052 × 8.5 × 180 + 0.7 × 1400
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 =
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 1580
80 + 980 1060 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
= = = 0.67 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 12.9 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
1580 1580 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Estimate the overburden gradient for Well B:

𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 0.052 × 8.5 × 6500 + 0.7 × 1400
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 =
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 7900
2873 + 980 3853 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
= = = 0.488 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 9.38 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
7900 7900 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓

9122
Riser Margin
Air Gap
Loss of Riser Drilling Fluid Column 87 ft
Loss of drilling fluid in the riser may occur due

to accidental disconnect or if the riser is
damaged. In the event the active mud weight
is heavier than the seawater, the mud level
would drop due to the U-tube effect and
reduce BHP. Also, if a small gas bubble enters 4000 ft
the riser, the potential exists for this bubble to
expand significantly when rising to the
surface. This gas expansion has been known
to displace large volumes of mud from the
riser. This type of issue can be seen when
1000 ft
flushing “stack gas” from a subsea BOP prior
to opening up the preventers after a well kill.
Riser collapse may be a concern whenever the
fluid level in the riser is reduced.
The following formula shows the pressure reduction due to an accidental disconnect.
(Sea Water = 8.5 ppg)
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 =
= 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 0.052 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 × 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊
Riser Margin (RM)
The MW increase required below the mud line to compensate for the removal of the
riser in order to maintain an equivalent BHP is called the riser margin.
Example:
Water Depth = 4000 ft Air Gap=87 ft
TVD=5087 ft CMW=9.0 ppg
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 0.052 × 9 × 4087 − 0.052 × 4000 × 8.5 = 144 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 144

𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = = = 2.78~2.8 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
0.052 × (𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 − 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀) 0.052 × 1000
The mud weight in the well required to sustain a loss of riser fluid would be (9+2.8) or
11.8 ppg.

- 3
Well Shut-In
While Drilling 1st Shut annular,

PU, and tag TJ.
1. Stop rotation
2. Space out: Pick up string to shut-in
position Choke
Kill UA Line
3. Stop the pumps Line
4. Shut-in the Annular BOP and open
the choke line valves on BOP stack LA
1. Notify Toolpusher and OIM 2nd Close hang-off
SR ram and hang off DS.
(OIM to notify DSM)
2. Monitor the riser for flow CSR
and be prepared to divert if
necessary (riser flow may be UPR
either gas in the riser or a
leaking annular) MPR
5. Record and monitor the shut-in drill LPR

pipe and choke pressure (note
density of fluid in choke and kill
lines). Record the gain in pit volume
and time of day.
6. Confirm the space-out and close the designated hang-off rams with
reduced closing pressure. Reduce the annular pressure as per
manufacturer’s guidelines, slack off and land drill string on the rams using
the drill string compensator (DSC).
7. Increase the manifold pressure back to 1500 psi. Engage ram locks.
8. Bleed off pressure between pipe rams and annular (if possible) and open
annular.
9. Adjust the DSC to support the drill string weight to the BOP plus 20,000
lbs. Position the DSC at mid-stroke.

9124
Bump The Float (BTF)

Prior to any well circulation, consider flushing the C&K Lines to

break gels and reduce CL/KL friction pressures.
1. If not previously done, mark the SICP SIDPP

value on the choke panel gauge to
represent the initial SICP value. SICP CP
KLP
2. Line up to pump active mud into drill
string.
3. Pump as slow as possible into string
w/well and choke closed. (Use cement
pump if available at ¼ bbl per min.)
4. The drill pipe pressure will be increasing
continuously pressuring the string up to
open float. Watch closely for an increase
in casing pressure as mud in the annulus
becomes pressured.
Kick
5. When the casing pressure increase is Influx
noted, stop the pump and record the
new CP and the pressure increase.
6. Read the drill pipe pressure and subtract
the casing pressure increase to BTF and
record this value as the correct SIDPP.
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 − (𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 − 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 )
7. Bleed trapped pressure off casing

pressure if necessary.
Consider leaving some residual “trapped” casing pressure as the Safety

Factor to be used for the well kill.
At times, people confuse the increase due to pumping with gas migrating
in the well. Usually gas migration is not at a rate to become an issue with
the procedure as it should only take a few minutes.

- 5
Measuring CLF & KLF Values

Procedure: Open Hole Method

KLFP/CLFP
1. Manifold rig pumps to allow circulation

down the choke line and into the
wellbore.
2. Pump down the CL at predetermined
reduced circulating rate(s) while taking
returns through the riser. Record the
CL/KL pressure noted for each pump
rate.
It is important to keep choke and kill lines
free from gelled or settled mud solids. To do
so, flush these lines once a tour. The CL/KL
friction pressure values may be efficiently
recorded at this time. CLFP & KLFP should
also be taken whenever mud properties
change.
Example: Cased Hole Method Actual CLFP & KLFP Values

- 6
Bring Pump Up To Speed (Using KLP)


ICP 900
800
500
SICP
400
380
Drill Pipe Casing
30 KLP SIKLP
SPM 400
Choke Position
0024
Strokes
Open Close
Example:
SIDPP from BTF = 250 psi SICP = 400 psi
SIKLP=400 psi Desired Kill Rate = 30 spm
BPUTS DPP Value = 900 psi CLFP =120 psi
Safety Margin 100 psi
1. As the pump comes on line the Choke Operator should crack open the choke
as needed to maintain KLP constant at the SIKLP value (plus any desired Safety
Margin). If the CLFP is greater than the SICP, the CLFP cannot be totally
compensated for and will show on the KLP monitor and DP gauge. If
uncompensated CLFP is excessive, the kill rate should be reduced. Choke
Operator should provide constant feedback to the Driller as to the progress.
2. Use choke to control KLP constant until DP pressure has stabilized @ the kill
pump rate. Read and record this drill pipe pressure as the BPUTS Value.
3. Determine the Initial Circulating Pressure (ICP) and mark this on the Choke
Panel Gauge for reference.
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

SM=KLP-SIKLP
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 900 − 100 = 800 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 800 − 250 = 550 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

- 7
Bring Pump Up To Speed (No KLP)


ICP 900
800
Stk Est Casing
Rate CLFP psi
SICP
400
0 0 400
280
15 30 370
Drill Pipe Casing
30 22 65 315
SPM Choke Position 30 120 280
0024 Casing psi vs. Stk Rate Schedule
Strokes
Open Close
1. Prepare a Casing Pressure vs. Stroke Rate Schedule for BPUTS without a KLM to
assist. The casing pressure needs to be reduced (incrementally) by the CLFP as
the pump comes up to the desired kill rate. If the incremental CLFP is not
available, it can be estimated by the following formula.
2
𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 ×
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸: 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 120 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 @ 30 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
2
15
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶15 = 120 × = 30 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
30
2. As the pump comes up to speed, the Choke Operator should crack open the
choke as needed to adjust the CP as per the CP vs. Stroke Rate Schedule (plus any
desired Safety Margin). Choke Operator should provide constant feedback to the
Driller during this important time.
3. Only after the DP pressure, the pump rate, and the CP have all stabilized; is
BPUTS achieved. Call this drill pipe pressure reading the BPUTS Value and
record it as such.
4. Choke Operator and Supervisor should determine the Initial Circulating Pressure
(ICP) and mark this on the Choke Panel Gauge for reference.

- 8
Driller’s Method (SS)

Two Rules of the Driller’s Method:

1. Hold KLP constant while BPUTS or while BPTO.
2. Hold the pressure constant on the side of the U-tube that has constant fluid
density.
These two rules work regardless of drill string geometry or wellbore
deviation.
First Circulation
SIDPP
1. Using Original Mud Weight Fluid, CP
BPUTS at desired Kill Rate and KLP
establish ICP and mark same on Choke
Panel. Be aware of uncompensated
CLFP (when SICP < CLF @ desired Kill
Rate).
2. Maintain DP pressure constant at the
ICP (plus desired safety factor) value
until all influx is circulated from the
well. Conduct a dynamic check: the
circulating KLP should be at or nearly
equal to the original SIDPP if all influx
is removed. (Or CP nearly equal to Kick
original SIDPP- CLF.) Influx
3. BPTO (stop the pump) holding KLP
constant and conduct a static check:
the SIKLP and SICP should be equal
and both should be at or near the
original SIDPP value (plus any Safety
Factor used).
4. Prepare or have available Kill Mud
Weight fluid.

- 9
Driller’s Method (SS) - continued

SIDPP Second Circulation

CP
KLP 1. Have available or calculate the drill
string volume (bbl or stks).
2. BPUTS using Kill Mud Weight fluid
while holding KLP constant to the
desired Kill Rate. DP pressure should
be equal to the original ICP
established in the First Circulation.
3. Maintain Casing Pressure Constant
as the KMW is circulated down the
drill string.
NOTE: It is critical that the annulus is
clear of gas if casing pressure is held
constant. If a clean annulus is in
question, a DP Pressure Schedule
should be developed and followed
to ensure correct BHP.
4. When Kill Mud Weight fluid begins exiting the drill string, note and record the
Drill Pipe Pressure (less any Safety Margin) as the Final Circulating Pressure
(FCP). Maintain the drill pipe pressure at the FCP value until KMW returns to
the surface.
5. BPTO (stop the pump) holding KLP constant. Conduct a static check: SICP,
SIKLP, and SIDP should be zero and the well dead (trapped pressure, if any, will
show on all three gauges).
6. Displace riser, C & K lines to KMW, flush BOP to remove stack gas. Circulate
and condition the drilling fluid.

9130
Driller’s Method Pressure Profiles (SS)

Driller’s Method (1st circulation)

PcMax → Gas @ Surface

Pressure
ICP
DP psi
Casing psi
KL psi
Shoe psi
SICP
SIKLP X
SIDPP X
To Bit To Shoe BOPS Bottoms Up Total Circ

Pump Strokes
Driller’s Method (2nd circulation)
DP psi
Casing psi
ICP KL psi
Pressure
Shoe psi
SIDPP XX

Pump Strokes

- 11
Wait & Weight Method Pressure Profiles (SS)

W & W Method
Gas @ Surface
PcMax →
DP psi
Casing psi
Pressure
ICP KL psi
Shoe psi
FCP
SICP X
SIDPP X

Pump Strokes
Advantages of the Driller’s Method Advantages of the W &W Method
• Circulation can be started right • Pressures exerted in the wellbore

away if necessary will generally be lower than if the
• Allows removing the influx from Driller’s Method was used. This
the well even if weighting difference is most significant if the
materials or means of increasing influx is gas, and for large kicks.
the mud weight are insufficient • The maximum pressure exerted on
• Minimizes the effect/chance for the shoe (or weak point in the open
gas migration hole) will normally be lower thus
• First circulation simple to reducing the risk of losses.
execute without calculations (Assuming:
Voldrillstring<AnnularVol beneath shoe)
• The well and well control
equipment will be under pressure
for less time.

- 12
Gas Entering the Choke Line

DP DP
CP CP
KLP KLP
Kill L gas
Line Choke
Line
Gas Just Gas Entering

Reaching SS BOP The Choke Line
KLP + HP KL to TVD = BHP = CP + HP CL to TVD + ∆P CLFP
When a gas influx begins entering the reduced ID of the CL , the result is an
increased rate of loss of hydrostatic from the choke gauge side of the
annulus and some of the original CLFP, thus an increase in CL pressure gauge.
The KLP monitor gauge is experiencing an increase in the HP on the KLP

gauge side of the annulus and begins to decrease slightly. Choke operator
may need to adjust (close) the choke slightly to increase the KLP to maintain
the ICP and BHP constant.
This is an early indicator that soon the gas will be at the choke and the choke
operator should be vigilant and prepared to “stop the drop” by proper choke
manipulation.

- 13
“Stopping the Drop” as Gas Reaches Surface

DP psi
2nd CP
KLP
Monitor DP and
KLP. After the
1st
appropriate lag, Steadily close
pressures should choke to stabilize
quickly stabilize the KLP.
and the choke
adjusted to set
proper DP
pressure.
Gas @ Surface
Opposite
technique helps and
when mud hits Exiting the
the choke after Choke
the gas exits.
The maximum casing pressure (Pcmax) on the casing gauge occurs when the gas
influx arrives at the surface choke. Thereafter, the casing pressure will begin to
drop as gas exits the system. The choke should be used at this point to control
the rate at which the casing pressure is decreasing. A gentle rate of pressure
decrease is preferred to a rapid one.
As a result of their different properties, the size of the choke opening that will
maintain the required backpressure on the well is different for liquid (mud, brine,
etc.) and gas. Consequently, the choke needs to be manipulated to increase or
decrease the size of the choke opening whenever there is a change in fluid type
going through the choke. Failure to do this in a timely manner may result in going
underbalanced or fracturing the weak point in the well.
What to do
When you observe the casing pressure and the kill line pressure decreasing
rapidly (not due to choke manipulation), steadily close the choke until you
stabilize the kill line pressure. If you over-correct, the kill line pressure will
increase rapidly requiring that the choke be opened to stabilize it. Confirm that
the KLP gauge has stabilized for 5 seconds or so, before checking the DPP gauge
to figure out your overbalance/underbalance condition and then adjust choke
accordingly.

- 14
Stack Gas Clearing

OMW Base Oil (BO)

KMW Gas KMW to surface, riser filled
w/KMW and well dead. Possible
gas beneath any closed BOP.
Choke 1. Isolate wellbore by closing the

Kill UA Line lowermost well control pipe rams. Line
Line
up and circulate BO down KL and up
upper most CL outlet while holding
LA “backpressure” on BOP cavity.
2. After BO returns are verified, shut down
SR
pump while holding CLP constant to trap
CSR
pressure on the BOP cavity.
3. After conditions are static, open choke
UPR bleed off backpressure and allow
residual gas to expand and enter CL.
MPR (Monitor BOP HPHT gauge below lower
most closed rams for leakage).
LPR
4. Circulate an additional total circulation
of BO across BOP. Vary rates to “flush”
as much as possible any remaining gas.
5. Line up and circulate KMW across BOP
cavity and flush and fill all KL and CL
outlets w/KMW.
Choke
Kill UA Line 6. Open the isolating lower BOP and check
Line well is dead.
7. Open BOPs and circulate BU from BOP
LA while monitoring riser.
SR 8. Circulate and condition mud.
CSR Note:
The negative pressure differential must
UPR not exceed the rating of the WH, BOP,
choke, and KL seals and gaskets.
MPR
This is a generic and simplified description
LPR of a complex procedure. Each SUBSEA Rig
should have a Standardized Procedure in
place for safely removing residual “stack
gas”.

9135
Gas in Riser and Unloading

RKB Late Detection

In severe instances, gas in the riser can

cause riser collapse and / or serious
ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 = ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 “unloading” events. Every effort should be
made to prevent these occurances. Some
causes of this “late detection” include:
• Influx occurs on connection due to loss
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 of ECD
ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = ℎ𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
• Gas in solution and bubble point depth
in riser section
• Failure to remove gas trapped beneath
BOP after kick
Example:
Riser length (TVD)=5000’
Riser ACF (19 x 5”)=0.326 bbl/ft
BOP ACF (18¾ x 5”)=0.317 bbl/ft
What is the “Unload Capacity (UC)” if gas from an 8 ft

cavity beneath the closed BOP enters the riser and
circulated to the surface?
Unload Condition
When height of gas is equal to the height of mud column above it.
ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = ℎ𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
Unload Capacity (UC) in bbl of drilling fluid:

ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝑉𝑉𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 = 2 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 × × ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 − ℎ𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟
0.317
𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 = 2 × 0.326 × × 8 × 5000 − 8 = 128 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.326

9136
Dynamic Volumetric / Lubrication

0
-10 +10 Present SICP
400 psi
-20 +20
-30 +30
MGS SIKLP
400 psi CLFP
∆V Trip Tank 80 psi
64 bbl @ 20 spm
The Dynamic Volumetric/Lubrication

method uses the principles of the
volumetric and lube and bleed
procedures to remove gas from Est. Gas Vol
45 bbl ACF
beneath a subsea BOP. Circulation 0.0707 bbl/ft
is maintained across the wellhead
while the pit gain/loss and surface MW
Choke and Kill line pressures are 12.6 ppg
controlled using the choke to allow
the gas to exit the well while
controlling BHP.
Two schedules are used during the process. A volumetric schedule is used to
account for gains in the surface pit volume due to expanding gas exiting the
annulus beneath the BOP and travelling up the choke line. A lube and bleed
schedule is used to account for mud that displaces the gas from the annulus
section beneath the BOP. Typically, the expectation is that the surface pit volumes
would initially gain volume as circulation is initiated and then begin losing mud
volume as gas is removed by the mud gas separator.
Preparation
Check that the Trip Tank has a suitable volume of Lube mud and able to measure
small mud volume changes (+/- 1 bbl). The volume to be lubricated should be
greater than the estimated volume of gas (be prepared to add mud “on the fly” if
necessary). Line up to circulate from the trip tank, down the KL, and up the CL.
Also route the returns through the mud gas separator.
Ensure that the kill line is full of mud. If there is any doubt, then the well should be
isolated and the kill line circulated with mud. This is required in order to ensure
that the pressure at the stack is accurately monitored.

9137
Dynamic Volumetric / Lubrication - continued

Example Data:
SICP & SIKLP = 400 psi MW = 12.6 ppg (Well &C&K lines)
Est. Gas Below BOP = 45 bbl CLFP&KLFP = 80 psi @ 20 spm

CL & KL Length = 5000 ft C&K Line ID = 4.0 inch
Procedure : Example
1. Calculate the HP per bbl of the mud in the well (annulus below BOP), and
mud in the choke and kill line. The KLP will be reduced as per the decrease in
the trip tank associated with the added HP in the annulus below the SS BOP.
0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 0.052 × 12.6
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = = = 9.26 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 0.0707
0.052 × 12.6
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐶𝐶&𝐾𝐾 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = = 42.25 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.0155
2. Calculate the KLP Initial & Final Circulating Pressures and construct a KLP vs
Trip Tank Volume Loss circulating pressure schedule. (For this example the
gas volume is 45 bbl).
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾@ 20 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 80 + 400 = 480 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 × 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾10 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 480 − 9.26 × 10 = 387 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾20 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑙𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 = 480 − 9.26 × 20 = 295 psi
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾30 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 480 − 9.26 × 30 = 202 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾@20 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶@20 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 + 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢𝑢
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 80 + 80 + 0 = 160 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
3. Calculate the CP vs Volume Gain Schedule for a Volumetric Procedure for the
gas as it enters the choke line and is circulated to the surface.
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖 𝐶𝐶&𝐾𝐾 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶10 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 = 400 + 10 × 42.25 = 823 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
4. Construct a chart showing CP and KLP Schedules vs Trip Tank Gain and Loss.

9138

Static Volumetric
Procedure Schedule with
2000 SF (shown for reference

only)
1800
X CP 30 bbl gain=1668 psi
1600
1400 42.25 psi/bbl
1200
KLP Schedule CP Schedule
1000
800
KLICP=480 psi
KLFCP=160 psi
(+ any HP underbalance) X 600
400 SICP=400 psi
X
9.26 psi/bbl 200
X
45 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
Loss Gain
Trip Tank Volume
5. BPUTS allowing casing pressure to reduce to SICP less CLF value, and then
hold constant to establish Kill Line Initial Circulating Pressure (KLICP). If the
choke line friction loss can be compensated, then the pumping pressure
(KLP) will be nearly equal to the KLICP. The kill line pressure will be
monitored and controlled by the choke during the entire operation. (For
this example, after BPUTS the KLP reads 560 psi, adjust choke to
compensate for the CLF such that KLP is as per schedule, = 480 psi if
possible).
6. Use the choke to control and increase the Casing Pressure (CP) as per
Volume Gains and to reduce the kill line pressure as indicated for any
Volume Loss. As gas is bled from the well, the pit level will drop as lube
mud replaces the gas. Note: Gains may not be observed due to lubricated
mud dispersing gas as it is circulated out of the well.
7. Continue with this procedure until all the influx has been vented from
below the stack. This will be indicated by a constant pit level, constant CP
reading, and constant KLP reading at or below the KLFCP Value. If the well
has been completely killed, the final circulating kill line pressure will be
equal to the kill line friction pressure loss, the choke line friction loss, and
the pressure loss through the wide open surface choke.

9139

Notes on Procedure
Field experience and tests conducted on Live Wells, show that the peak casing
pressure is reduced because the gas is dispersed by the circulated mud as it’s
brought to the surface in small increments. This dispersion reduces the severity
of choke line pressure variations to such a degree that no major choke
adjustments are required. Thus some of the gas is removed before the main
volume is brought to the surface. In this way, gas expansion within the well is
minimized. What this means is that Volumetric / CP schedule will be minimally
referenced during the process and the KLP will be more relied upon as to
bottom hole pressure status.
Reference: J. L. Mathews and A. T. Bourgoyne, (1983)

9140
Emergency Disconnects
Emergency Disconnect
An emergency disconnect is inevitable when operating in deep water. It is

important that the sequence takes place without jeopardizing the safety of the
crew and without damaging the riser, BOP equipment, and the environment.
Some of the more common reasons for an emergency disconnect are:

• Loss of power
• Single point failure (moored vessels)
• Dynamic positioning failure (DP vessels)
• Operator error
• Rapid and severe weather change
Emergency Disconnect Sequence (typical)

1. Hang off the DP
2. Shear the DP
3. PU DP out of BOP ram area
4. Close the B/S rams
5. Disconnect The LMRP
6. Move the rig away from wellhead
Telescopic Joint Stroke-Out vs. Vessel Offset

Time to Disconnect (min)
Water Depth 3000’ 4000’ 5000’ 6000’
Distance to Travel 425’ 490’ 550’ 600’
Time to disconnect(1) 5.6 6.4 7.2 7.9
Distance to travel:
Horizontal distance that gives 30 ft stroke-out of telescopic joint. Differing space-
outs of the telescopic joint will alter the above times.
(1) Drift-off at ¾ knots average speed.
(2) Drift-off at 2 knots average speed.
(3) Drift-off in 3 knots current.
Example Taken from a Deep Water Drillship

9141
Dead-Man, and Auto-Shear Systems

Dead-Man System (DMS)

The purpose of the DMS is to shut-in and secure the well in event of a parted riser
caused by a drift-off or drive-off of a DP vessel. The DMS should respond
automatically and not require manual initiation, “dead-man”. The system should
auto sense the drift-off / drive-off condition and initiate the DMS. Battery power
will provide electrical power and signal and the subsea accumulators will provide
hydraulic fluid power.
DMS to initiate if the following conditions exists:

• Simultaneous loss of hydraulic supply and signal transmission capacity in both
subsea control pods.
• Subsea accumulators are charged
• DMS selector switch at panel is in “ARM” position
The DMS is considered a “rapid discharge” system.
Auto-Shear System
The auto-shear is designed to automatically shut-in the wellbore in the event of a
disconnect of the LMRP. This is considered a “rapid discharge” system. Should be
tested on the test stump.
Note: When the auto-shear is armed, a disconnect of the LMRP closes the shear
rams.

9142
Remote Operating Vehicle (ROV) Intervention

ROV Intervention
The ROV is the eyes and arms below water.

The ROV can perform tasks with cameras
and manipulators in support of the drilling
operations. Critical functions on the BOP
stack are equipped with a hydraulic over-
ride intervention system. The over-rides
are operated through hydraulic stabs
which have fluid supplied from mini
accumulators and pump located on the
ROV. In an emergency, seawater may be
substituted and pumped straight to the
functions.
The ROV intervention system is installed to

work as a back-up to the Multiplex control
unit. A panel should be located on the
Lower Marine Riser Package (LMRP) and
tied into the hydraulic connector and
release of the ring gasket.
A lower panel should be located on the

BOP stack for operating:
• Each shear rams
• One pipe ram
• Ram locks
• Release of the hydraulic connector
• Release of the wellhead ring gasket
All critical functions shall meet closing time

requirements indicated in API STD 53.

9143
Version 1.3
Tenet 5
requirements.”

& WORKOVER
10 COMPLETION
“Always meet or exceed customers’
10
144
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. 10 – Completion & Workover
Completions and Workover

Completions
After drilling the reservoir, completion operations are typically performed to

establish initial production.
Completion type examples:
o Slotted liner
o Pre-packed screens
o Dual string
o Open hole w/Electric Submersible Pump (ESP)
Workovers
Well workovers are usually conducted with the tree removed and the rig BOP
installed. If the tree is located on the wellhead, the well is typically killed before
the removal of the tree and installation of the BOP stack.
Common reasons for workover:
o Re-establish commercial production
o Repair mechanical problem
o Plug and abandonment
o Conversion to another well type (e.g., injector, disposal, etc.)
Factors Drilling Workover and Completion

Wellbore fluids Filter cake provides additional Clear fluids do not provide
seal to wellbore wellbore seal
Gas migration Generally slower due to mud Much faster due to clear fluids
properties
Surface pressure limits MISICP may be a critical Formation breakdown is generally
concern less critical
Well control methods Typically have to weight-up Weight-up not usually required
mud to kill well (use of W&W (bullheading, reversing or first
or Driller’s method) circulation of Driller’s Method)
Overbalance condition Usually overbalanced Usually at or slightly
underbalanced
CO & WO vs. Drilling Well Control

10-
Completions and Workovers

Mechanical Barriers Used in CO/WO

• Permanent packer with plug
• Bridge plug & Cement retainer

• Stab-in safety valve, full opening safety valve (FOSV)
• Two-way check valve
• Backpressure valve
• Blow Out Preventer (BOP)
• Wireline lubricator
• Production tree
• Formation Isolation Valve
• Crown plug
• Valve removal plug
Planning and Considerations
Review data from all available sources (drilling, production,
reservoir, geology)
• Current well status (for workover wells):
o Tubing pressure and annulus pressures
o Expected reservoir pressure
o Fluids in tubing and annulus
o Wellhead/tree pressure limitations
o Completion details
o Casing/cementing data
o Obstructions in tubing due to wireline/CT operations
o Casing/tubing condition
o VR plugs installed in wellhead valves
• Develop well control procedures for each stage of WO and CO:
o Initial well kill
o Remove/install of Christmas tree
o Nipple up/down BOP
o Clean out the well
o Run completion equipment
o Perform wireline operations

10-
Kick Awareness and CO/WO Operations


• Fluid loss to the formation is common in WO/CO

operations
• Loss varies with permeability, fluid viscosity, and
degree of overbalance
• Wide range of viscosifiers, and solids are used to
Tripping w/Fluid
control loss rates
Loss • If loss rates remain consistent while tripping, then
monitoring the proper fill on the way out is more
straight forward and less of a risk
• Loss rates can vary with pipe movement and with
the simple passing of time
Practices for displacing to lower density fluid

Wellbore Fluid
Displacement fluids and pressure effects across well
Displacements barriers
Risks and mitigations

Negative Testing Pressure differentials, formation fluids influx
Perforating and • Handling influx volumes and types

Drill Stem Testing • Underbalanced perforating
(DST) • Reversing
Slick line
• Alloys available for H2S & CO2
• OD of wire is easy to seal around /packing element
in stuffing box
Wireline Braided line
Operations • Multi-strand, stronger than slick line
• OD of wire require a grease seal arrangement
e-line
• Multi-strand with internal wires sheathed with
insulating material

10-
Kick Awareness and CO/WO Operations - continued


Lubricators
• Sufficient length to cover tool string
• 5000 psi, 10000 psi, & 15,000psi units
BOPs, Slick line Valve/Ram and Seal
• Manual or hydraulic
Wireline • Cannot manually open a hydraulic slick line valve
• Can manually close a hydraulic valve if fitting on
Operations valve is removed
(continued) • Seal can contain pressure without wire
Braided Line BOP
• Grease must be injected between upper and lower
rams to effect a seal on well pressure
• Should wire break, a ball check or pump out plug
will stop flow from the top of lubricator
• Rat hole below packer may contain formation
fluids
• When packer is unseated or the seal nipples pulled
above the packer bore, trapped gas escapes into
Unseating Packers the annulus and starts migrating up the wellbore
• Usually no immediate indicator that the trapped
gas is there thus the crew may be unaware of the
possible danger
• Circulating to remove fill from the active wellbore
occurs with frequency in CO/WO operations
Cleaning Out Fill • Fill can seal off the producing zone from the hole
above the fill, possibly at considerable distance off
bottom

10-
Planning Checklist for Workover

Pre-Workover Well Diagnostics

 Information Comments
Ensure that the tree has been serviced and

any repairs have been made. Verify BPV
Tree schematic thread profile.
Ensure that hot bolting, packing pins, etc.
meet specifications.
Review well files and all wireline tickets.

Well files / Wireline
including office file and field files. The wireline
tickets
company also maintains records.
If the SCSV is isolated for testing, verify ability

to lock with a fusible plug (threaded cap) that
Surface controlled is designed to melt (compliance with
safety valve (SCSV) regulatory requirements).
Repair or remove SCSV as needed and install
a standard manual valve.
Verify ability to fully open without any control

line leak. An operable SCSSV can be used as
Surface controlled a temporary barrier when nippling down the
sub-surface safety tree and nippling up the BOPE.
valve (SCSSV)
Wireline ops can be performed through a
flapper type SCSSV using a hang-off tool.
The valve can be locked open.
Critical for pressure equipment needed for

wireline operations. Actual pressure
measurements can be taken to determine
MASP (e.g., SBHP gauge).
Maximum allowable
A flanged connection at the top of the tree
surface pressure
(MASP) recommended for pressure in excess of 3500
psi.
The number of rams and use of hydraulically
assisted pack off is dictated by MASP.
Consult with the slickline operator.

10-
Production Tree
Tree Components
A tree is an assembly of valves and

Tree Cap
fittings used to control production and
Crown or provide access to the production string.
Swab Valve It includes all equipment above the
Wing Valves
tubing head top flange. Many variations
in arrangement of these fittings are
Tree available to satisfy the needs of any
completion design.
Upper Master
Valve Choke Valves and Tree Fittings
Body
Lower Master Full opening valves must be used in the
Valve vertical run of the tree assembly to
provide access to the tubing. Full
Tubing Head Spool opening valves must also be used on the
tubing head outlets and casing head
outlets equipped for valve removal
service.
Casing Head Spool
Tree fittings include tees, crosses, and
other connections suitable for the
application. The size of the vertical run
must be consistent with the master
valve and tubing head adapter flange
size to give full opening access to
wireline tools and instruments. All tree
assemblies must be pressure tested,
and checked with a drift mandrel to
assure full opening before installation.
Tree Cap
A tree cap is a device attached to the top of the tree to provide fast and safe rig-
up of a lubricator for swabbing or testing.

10-
Tubing Head and Tubing Hanger

Tubing Head
A spool type housing attached to the top flange on the casing head to provide a
support for the tubing string and seal the annular space between the tubing string
and production casing. Tubing heads are available with one or two side outlets
which may be threaded, studded, or extended flanged. All outlets should be
equipped for valve removal service. The lower flange is constructed with a recess
to accommodate a bit guide or a bit guide and crossover seal.
The upper and lower flanges on a tubing head are usually of the same working
pressure unless a crossover seal is used to cross over to a higher working pressure
top flange. By using a crossover seal to reduce the piston area exposed to well
pressure, a top flange may be used with a working pressure one rating above the
lower flange, provided the body and outlet dimensions also correspond to the
higher rating.
The working pressure rating of the tubing head should be at least equal to the
anticipated surface shut-in pressure of the well.
Tubing Hanger
The tubing hanger is a device used to provide a seal between the tubing and
tubing head. The hanger is attached to the top of the tubing string and lands and
seats in the tubing head bowl supporting the full weight of the tubing string. The
tubing hanger usually provides a threaded landing for a back pressure valve and
the hanger landing joint.
Tubing Head Adapter Flange
The tubing head adapter flange is an intermediate flange used to connect the top
tubing head flange to the master valve.

10-
Back Pressure Valve

Back Pressure Valve (BPV)

A backpressure valve , or tubing plug, is usually a one-way check valve that is
installed in a specially machined profile in the tubing hanger or plug bushing.

The BPV is designed to prevent the flow of fluids and gases through the
hanger, but still allows the pumping of fluid into the tubing string. They are
installed in the well to remove the production tree and allow the initial nipple
up of the BOP stack, to install the tree while nippling down the BOP stack, and
while heavy lifts are being made over the wellhead.
The BPV can be installed or removed with either the tree or BOP stack nippled
up on the tubing head. Installation of the BPV through the tree, with pressure
on the well, requires the use of a lubricator. Wellhead manufacturers have
various designs for backpressure valves depending on the size and make of the
hanger and wellhead. Personnel trained by wellhead manufacturers are the
only ones who should install and remove backpressure valves.
Body
Seal Ring
Maximum
DD Thread
Valve
Spring
Valve Stem
Pack Pressure Valve (BPV) Lubricator Used to Install or

Remove Pack Pressure Valve (BPV)
Two Way Check Valves
Two-way check valves are back pressure valves designed to seal in either direction
and are used for testing BOPS and the tree when initially nippled up. These valves
may be threaded and seated into the tubing hanger or may be of a profile type and
landed by wireline into a similarly profiled landing nipple.

10-
Valve Removal Plugs

Valve Removal (VR) Plugs

The valve removal plug (VR plug) is a threaded one-way check valve that can be
installed through an outlet valve on a casing head, casing spool or tubing spool
into a female thread in the outlet. This isolates the valve from any pressure and
allows removal of the outlet valve for its repair or replacement.
Once the valve has been repaired or replaced, it can be reinstalled and the VR
plug should be removed.
Note: VR plugs are intended for short-term use and should not be considered
as a long-term replacement for wellhead valves.
Most wellheads installed on new wells have threads machined into the outlets
to allow installation of a VR plug. However, many of the older wellheads are not
set up for a VR plug.
Valve Removal (VR) Plug
VR Lubricator

10-
Subsurface Safety Valves (SSV)

Surface Controlled Control Line

Surface controlled subsurface safety valves Tubing
(SCSSV) are installed in the tubing string below Flow Coupling

the surface (or mudline in offshore applications) SCSSV
and are designed to shut the well in should a
catastrophic event occur at the surface that Flow Coupling
might cause the wellhead to be severely
damaged or lost. The valve is controlled by a Side Pocket Mandrel
small diameter steel control line that is run down w/ Gas Lift Valve
the outside of the tubing from the surface to the & Latch
valve. If the wellhead were to become damaged

badly enough to rupture the control line, a loss of
pressure from the line would cause the valve to Sliding Sleeve
close and seal the well off.

Basically, there are two designs for these valves: Packer
tubing retrievable and wireline retrievable. The
wireline retrievable valves allow for the major
components of the valve (other than the body) to Landing Nipple
be pulled from the well and serviced or replaced.

Pumpout Plug
The tubing retrievable model requires the tubing
string to be pulled from the well in order to gain
access to the valve. These valves are “flapper
Completion Components
type” and can be locked open using wireline tools (Wireline Retrievable Gas Lift)
in order to facilitate access to the tubing string
below the valve for additional wireline
operations.
Considerations concerning the use of the surface controlled subsurface safety valve
(SCSSV) are:
• Flapper type valves are more easily pumped through from the surface during
killing operations.
• The stated closing pressure for a valve is the determining factor for maximum
setting depth. Maximum depth is equal to the closing pressure divided by the
control fluid gradient (plus a safety factor). Usually a light oil (gradient = 0.35
psi/ft) is used as a control fluid.
• Operationally test the subsurface safety valve and place in the locked open
position prior to running in the hole.
Hydraulic Control Panel – Emergency Shutdown Systems (ESD)
The hydraulic control panel or emergency shut down system controls the surface
safety valves (SSV) and the subsurface safety valves (SSSV). The operator should be
familiar with the basic operations as this controls the safety system on the platform.
The ESD is manually adjusted for the safety valve type and well conditions.

10-
Subsurface Safety Valves (SSV) - continued

During normal operation and some workover

operations, the ESD system is used to hold the
SCSSV open. Care must be taken not to shut in the
panel, and close the SCSSV on slickline, coiled

tubing, electric line, etc. Often a temporary
lockout feature is activated in the SCSSV or an
isolation sleeve is run inside the SCSSV to hold it
open during the workover.
Usage of a blocking needle valve to hold the safety
valve open can be very risky (i.e., no safety system
exists if this is used). If the tubing pressure rises
(such as during frac operations) or if the tubing
heats up, the control line pressures will rise and
could blow the seals in the hanger or worse.
Conversely, if the tubing cools down, the control
line could see a pressure drop, and the safety valve
could close.
SCSSV Emergency
The basic ESD system includes: Shut-Down Panel
• Clean, dry, gas source of approximately 125 psi
• ESD Shut Down Loop – If this low pressure gas loop ( may be interfaced with
remote shut-in, thermal plugs, high/low pilots, etc.) is lost, then a closing
sequence is initiated.
• A high pressure pneumatic / hydraulic ratio pump (operator adjusted)
• An over pressure / thermal expansion relief system
• A time delay circuit to allow sequential shut-in (operator adjusted)
Subsurface Controlled Subsurface Safety Valve (SSCSSV)
This category of subsurface safety valve is controlled by the well conditions at depth,
which may be flow or pressure activation. All of these valves are NOT fail safe and
may be normally open as seen with velocity valves also known as “storm chokes”.
A surface emergency shut down hydraulic control panel does NOT control these
valves as it does with an SCSSV mentioned in the previous section. These may be
used for production and are very commonly seen in injection valves to provide a
downhole safety system to prevent backflow or production if the injection bridges
into an active formation. The initial setup or calibration of the valve is very
important, as is the continuous re-calibration to meet changing well conditions.
Testing Subsurface Safety Valves
An inflow (negative test) must be conducted per CVX Barrier Standards. Test shall be
to the maximum possible differential pressure the valve may be subjected to. Test
shall be for a minimum of 30 minutes, with leakage rates not to exceed 4.5 oz/min
liquid or 5 scfm of test gas.

10-
Plugs
Tubing Nipples and Wireline Plugs

There are many types and models of tubing nipples and associated tubing plugs.
These plugs will effect a seal in the tubing string, and uses include:
• To act either as a back pressure valve (BPV) if a BPV profile is not available in the
tubing hanger, or as an additional barrier when nippling up or down a tree / BOP
stack
• During snubbing operations where the tubing string is run with a plug in place to
prevent flow up the workstring
• When installing nipples in tailpipes of permanent packers, which allows the
packer to be set on wire line with a plug in place. At that point, the tubing string
can be run without any open perforations
Numerous types of plugs can be set using tubing or electric line and a lubricator
which can be permanent or drillable. Examples include cast iron bridge plugs (CIBP),
composite drill plugs (casing or tubing), permanent tubing plugs (e.g., Magna Range)
and cement retainers (used to hold pressure underneath and for squeeze
cementing, electric line or drill pipe set). Plug testing varies with the application.
Sometimes a positive test alone is adequate. Other times a negative test is
performed.
Completion Plugs
Providers of completion equipment offer methods to isolate perforations, usually in
conjunction with packers and gravel pack equipment. A simple method for
eliminating communication after perforating with a casing gun is to run a packer on
electric line that has a glass disc or pump out plug. A glass disc can be broken with
slick line. A pump-out plug is pinned to hold a specified pressure (hydrostatic and
surface pressure).
Upon completion of a gravel pack job, a sliding sleeve can be closed, allowing the
completion to be run with the perforations isolated.
Vendors can advise as to what is available, how the plugs are used and how to test
the plugs.

10-
Wireline
A wireline operation is the process of running a tool string attached to a wire

into or out of a wellbore, with or without pressure, to carry out specific well
intervention operations in a safe and controlled manner.

During any wireline operation, it is necessary to maintain constant awareness of
existing barriers and any alteration to barriers.
Wireline Applications
Setting or retrieving tools (e.g., gas lift valves, SCSSV, plugs, packers)
• Fishing
• Logging
• Perforating
• Paraffin cutting
• Sand bailing
• Spot treating or cement spotting
• Opening and closing sleeves and ports
The three types of wireline commonly used for workover operations are
slickline, braided line and electric line. Slickline and braided line operations are
normally done through a tubing string, but can also be performed through a
workstring with the workover rig on location. Some wireline units have slickline
on one drum and braided line on the other. Their functions are not
interchangeable.
Slickline Characteristics
• Single strand of flexible high-strength steel with a small diameter
• Special alloys are available for H2S and CO2 service
• Common diameters: 0.072”, 0.092”, 0.105", 0.108” and 0.125”
• Minimum rated breaking strength ranges from 961 lb to 3203 lb
• OD of wire is easy to seal around with packing device called stuffing box
Slickline

10-
Wireline - continued
The major uses of slickline related to workover well control are as follows:
• Pre-workover well diagnostics / well prep
• Barrier installation to eliminate / reduce well control risk for the workover rig
• Communicating tubing and casing to circulate and kill a well
• Operating mechanical spang jars for setting / retrieving tools or barriers
Braided Line Characteristics

• Multi-strand cable that is stronger than
slickline
• Special alloys are available for H2S and
CO2 service
• Common diameters: 3/16” and 7/32”
• Breaking strengths range from 4500 lb to
6000 lb
• OD of wire requires a grease seal
arrangement
Braided line has greater pulling strength
than slickline. The major uses of braided line
related to workover well control are as
follows:
• Fishing
• Pulling a barrier or stuck plug
• Retrieving stuck flow control devices
• Swabbing the well Braided Line
Electric Line Characteristics

• Multi-strand line with internal wires sheathed in insulating material
• Common diameters are 0.23”, 0.29” and 0.32”
• Breaking strengths range from 5600 lb to 9000 lb
Common Applications
• Logging (e.g, cement bond log, depth correlation)
• Perforating
• Operating any downhole tool that requires an electrical charge to activate it
(e.g., packers, bridge plugs, etc.)

10-
Wireline BOPE
Wireline BOP requirements increase with pressure. Braided line requires grease
to seal. pressure. The grease injection pressure should be 20% above wellbore
pressure.
Working Pressures
• 0 – 4000 psi = 5000 psi working pressure
• 4001 – 8000 psi = 10,000 psi working pressure
• 8001 – 13000 psi = 15,000 psi working pressure
Slickline BOPE
• Manual or hydraulic operation
• Hydraulic slickline valve can not be manually opened when closed
• Can manually close a hydraulic valve if fitting on valve is removed
• Seal can contain pressure without wire
Typically for pressures above 3000 psi, a flanged connection at the end of the
lubricator is required unless rigging up on a workstring.
Braided Line BOPE

Grease injection is required for closing rams on braided line when under well
pressure. The grease injection pressure should be 20% above wellbore
pressure.
Block Manifold Piston
Open
Closed
Rams w/Seals
Braided Line BOP

(Bottom Ram Inverted)

10-
Wireline BOPE - continued

Correct Incorrect
Ram Assembly Ram Assembly
Single Ram – Slickline / Braided Line Assembly

.
Lubricators
Lubricators should be tested using either a
pump with fluid or gas pressure from a
nearby well. Hydrates can form in the
lubricator and pack-off while using either
slick line or braided line. Glycol can be Stuffing box
introduced to prevent hydrates
A hydraulic pack off / grease injector is
required for pressure beyond 1500 psi. A
pump-in sub is normally required on all high Lubricator
pressure applications. A full shut-off valve
(TIW) is usually placed below the lubricator.
Bleed off Sub
Should the wire break, a ball check for
braided line or a pump out plug will stop
flow from the top of the lubricator.
Wireline Valves
Stuffing Box
A pack-off or stuffing box, is ordinarily
utilized on smaller slick line or low pressure
braided line operations. The stuffing box is Pump -in Tee
similar to grease injectors in that they are
run on top of the lubricator to prevent flow Tree Adapter
of wellbore fluids out of the lubricator while
wireline operations are in progress.

10-

Flow Tubes
Flow tubes are located below the grease injection head. Grease is injected under
pressure into the grease injection collar which effects a seal around the wireline.
Grease exits at the grease drain hose at atmospheric pressure.
The grease injection pressure
should be 20% more than the well Wireline
pressure.
Stuffing Box
This equipment is attached to the
top of the lubricator on a braided
line/electric line setup.
There is very small clearance
between the cable and the rubber
inserts generally between 0.002 – Drain
Hose
0.008 in. The grease maintains well Flow-tubes
pressure at the well end and
Hydraulic Hand Pump
atmospheric pressure at the stuffing
box end. Grease
Injection
The number of flow-tubes used Collar
Grease Hose
depends on surface pressure and Grease Pump
the type of produced fluids. The Check Valve
chart below may be used as a guide Air

in deciding the number of flow-
tubes to install for a particular
pressure situation. Waste Grease
Well Pressure (psi) Fluid Type Number of Flow Tubes
0 – 5000 Liquid 3
0 – 5000 Gas 3
5000 – 10000 Liquid 4
5000 – 10000 Gas 4 to 5
10000 – 20000 Liquid 6

10000 – 20000 Gas 6 or more

10-

Emergency Shut-in Procedure while Using Wireline

Wireline work is often performed under pressure, so that a kick already exists
in the well. When working on such wells, it is imperative that the entire tool
string can be brought up into the lubricator, allowing for recovery of the tool
prior to killing the well, if necessary.
It is also advisable to have a means of automatically shutting-in if the wire
parts at the surface (e.g., a Bowen blowout plug in the stuffing box).
It is recommended that pressure control equipment be configured with a
pump-in sub in the event it is necessary to pump kill weight fluid.
Upon detection of flow or leakage from the lubricator, appropriate steps must
be taken to shut the well in.
The following procedure below addresses a failure in lubricator / pressure

control equipment, but the shut-in procedures can vary depending on the
configuration of the pressure control equipment.
1. Alert crews
2. Shut WL rams and confirm flow has stopped
3. Bleed off trapped pressure
4. Address failed component (e.g., failed packing, hole in lubricator section,
etc.)
5. Pressure test lubricator and confirm operability of pressure control
equipment
6. Equalize pressure across WL rams
7. Open WL rams and continue wireline activities
Shearing Wireline
• Electric line cannot be sheared with the standard wireline valves.
• Shear seal rams can be used in the lubricator assembly in high pressure
applications.
• Manual and hydraulic tree valves may cut up to 0.108” slick line but will not
cut braided cable.
• A drop down type wireline cutter ("go-devil"), such as Kinley or Flo-petrol,
may be used. This type of cutter cannot be used in a dry gas well.

10-
Completion & Workover Fluids

Primary functions:
• Control of reservoir pressure, prevention of formation damage, sufficient
fluid properties to transport solids

• Desired characteristics:
• Easily weighted or diluted for well control, non-damaging to the reservoir,
stable at surface and downhole conditions, easily viscosified for solids
transport
Types:
Clear brines, solids-laden fluid, brine-in-oil emulsion, CaCl2 brine in diesel,
weighted “all oil” fluids, high-density organics in diesel, oil-based muds
Clear Brines
• Heavier salts are more expensive. Salt mixtures for a particular weight may
be more economical.
• Density of brine decreases with increasing temperature.
• Crystallization point: Point at which salt crystals begin to form and come
out of solution.
Effect of crystallization: Change in brine density due to salt settling. It
becomes difficult to reestablish desired density. Flow restrictions can develop
in sub-surface equipment.
Clear Brine Density Ranges

Ammonium Chloride
Potassium Chloride
Sodium Chloride
Sodium Formate
Calcium Chloride
Sodium Bromide
Potassium Formate
Calcium Bromide
Cesium Formate
Zinc Bromide
8.4 9.4 10.4 11.4 12.4 13.4 14.4 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4
Maximum Density (ppg)

10-
Thermal Expansion of Clear Brines

Brine weight (ppg) Weight loss (ppg/°F)

8.4 – 9.0 0.0017

9.1 – 11.0 0.0025
11.1 – 14.5 0.0033
14.6 – 17.0 0.0040
17.1 – 19.2 0.0048
Density of brines decrease with increasing temperature
Example:
Calcium chloride brine
Average wellbore temperature (AWBT) = 150°F
Fluid Density (FD) to balance zone pressure = 11.2 ppg (Calculated from
reservoir pressure)
Surface mixing temperature = 80°F
What fluid density should be mixed?
FD @ 80° = FD @ AWBT+ (AWBT – Surf Temp) x Weight loss (ppg/°F)

= FD @ 150° + (150° – 80°) x 0.0033
= 11.2 + 70° x 0.0033
= 11.2 + 0.23 = 11.5 ppg
Crystallization of Clear Brines

 Crystallization occurs at lower temperatures when salt crystals
settle out from brine solution.
 Crystallization lowers the density of a brine and may develop flow

restrictions.
 To avoid crystallization and allow weight up of brine (consult brine

supplier), use proper brine formulation.

10-
Reversing
Reverse Circulation
Reverse circulation is a method of pumping down
the shut-in annulus and receiving returns through

the tubing back through a choke.
Common Reasons:
• Bullheading not an option
o Plugged perfs
o Low permeability zone
o Questionable tubing and casing
conditions
• Drill Stem Test (DST)
Maintaining constant BHP may not be a concern

while reversing out an influx. In case it is required
to hold constant BHP, annulus should be full of a
known fluid and the casing pressure should be
maintained constant while circulating. To hold
constant BHP also requires lining up the tubing to
the choke manifold.
Advantages to Reversing
• Faster influx removal
• Casing is protected from harmful fluids
• Less contaminated fluid at the surface
• Casing may be exposed to less pressure
compared to Driller’s Method

10-
Version 1.3

APPENDIX
A166
- 1
© 2014 Chevron U.S.A. Inc. All Rights Reserved. Company Confidential. Appendix
Abbreviations and Acronyms

ACF Annular Capacity Factor

AS Annular Stripping
BCP Blowout Contingency Plan

BH Bullhead
BHP Bottom Hole Pressure
BLEVE Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapor Explosion
BOPE Blowout Preventer Equipment
BPUTS Bring Pump Up To Speed
BPTO Bring Pump To Off
BR Blind Ram
BTF Bump The Float
BU Business Unit
CLF Choke Line Friction
CMW/OMW Current or Original Mud Weight
CP Casing Pressure
DM Driller’s Method
DP Drill Pipe
DPP Drill Pipe Pressure
DSM Drill Site Manager
ECD Equivalent Circulating Density
EDS Emergency Disconnect Sequence
EOB End Of Build
FCP Final Circulating Pressure
FD/MW Fluid Density / Mud Weight
FIT Formation Integrity Test
FOSV Full Opening Safety Valve
FP/PP Formation Pressure / Pore Pressure
FrP Friction Pressure
HCR Hydraulic Controlled Ram
HP Hydrostatic Pressure
IBOP Inside Blowout Preventer
ICF Internal Capacity Factor
ICP Initial Circulating Pressure
ISICP Initial Shut-In Casing Pressure
KLF Kill Line Friction Pressure
KOP Kick Off Point
Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook A167

- 2
Abbreviations and Acronyms - continued

KMW Kill Mud Weight

L&B Lube & Bleed
LM Lube Mud
LMW Lube Mud Weight
LOT Leak-Off Test
MAASP Max Allowable Annular Surface Pressure
MASP Maximum Anticipated Surface Pressure
MD Measured Depth
MI Mud Increment
MISICP Maximum Initial Shut-In Casing Pressure
PG Pressure Gradient
PI Pressure Increment
SCR Slow Circulating Rate
SG Specific Gravity
SICP Shut-In Casing Pressure
SIDPP Shut-In Drill Pipe Pressure
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SP Surface Pressure
TDS Top Drive System
TPC Trapped Pressure Check
TOC Top Of Cement
TOL Top Of Liner
TVD Total Vertical Depth
VM Volumetric Method
W&W Wait & Weight Method

A168
Miscellaneous
Units Usage – Typical US Oilfield Unit Are Used Throughout

Weight or density ppg or ppge (equivalent)

Lengths / Depths ft
Pipe OD or ID, Hole ID inches
Volume bbl
Pressure psi
Capacity Factors bbl/ft
Pressure Gradient psi/ft
Volume Rate gpm or bpm
Stroke Rate spm or stk/min
Pressure Ratings K or M 1000’s of psi
Temperature (default) ⁰Farhenheit
Rounding Rules
Kill Mud Weight

• Round up to one decimal place (12.21 ppg to 12.3 ppg, 11.67 ppg to 11.7 ppg)
Leak Off Test (LOT)
• Round down to one decimal place (12.21 ppg to 12.2 ppg, 11.67 ppg to 11.6 ppg)

A169
Formulas
1) 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 (𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2 ) = 0.7854 × 𝐷𝐷2

𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 (𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙)
2) 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 =
𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 (𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖2 )
3) 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 = 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
4) 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
5) 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
6) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
7) 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 + 0.052×𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
8) 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 − 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
9) 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = 0.052 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 − 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
10) 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
11) 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
12) 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 = 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 + 0.052×𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇
2
𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼
13) 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼2
14) 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 1029.4
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼2 −𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2

15) 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 1029.4
ID= ID of Casing or Open Hole Diameter
16) 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = 0.000357 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
17) ℎ𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻

18) 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅 = 0.052×𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀

A170
Formulas - continued
19. Volume Gain From Pumping Slug

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 − 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑉𝑉𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 ×

𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶
𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 2
20. 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 = 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂 × 𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑅𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂
21. Boyle’s Law - 𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1 = 𝑃𝑃2 × 𝑉𝑉2 or,

𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1 𝑃𝑃1 × 𝑉𝑉1
𝑃𝑃2 = & 𝑉𝑉2 =
𝑉𝑉2 𝑃𝑃2
22. Maximum Lube Volume/Pressure Per Lube Cycle

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑉𝑉𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
𝑉𝑉𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 𝑉𝑉𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 +
2 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
0.5
2
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 − 𝑉𝑉𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 × 𝑉𝑉𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
− +
2 × 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
Where: Vgas = Volume of Gas Prior to Lube
LM= Lube Mud
CPInitial=Casing Pressure Prior to Lube

65.5−×𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
23. 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 =
65.5
24. 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 = 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴
25. 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃, 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹, 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 & Snubbing Force (SF)

𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 = 0.7854 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = 𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 + 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 + 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵
26. Buoyed Weight of Tubulars (closed ended & no fluid in pipe): Wb (lb/ft)
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏 = 𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 −
24.5

A171
27. After filling the pipe, Effective String Weight will be: (closed ended, different fluid
in pipe and annulus) Wb (lb/ft)
𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻

𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏 = 𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 + −
24.5 24.5
28. The Balance Point in unfilled pipe occurs when the length of pipe run into the
well is: L (ft)
𝐹𝐹𝑝𝑝
𝐿𝐿 =
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 −
24.5
29. The Balance Point while filling pipe occurs when the length of pipe run into the
well is: L (ft)
𝐹𝐹𝑝𝑝
𝐿𝐿 =
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃
𝑊𝑊𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 − +
24.5 24.5
30. Maximum Down Force on Jacks
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 = 0.7 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷
31. Effective Area of Snubbing Jacks (2 or 4) (in2)
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 = 𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁𝑁 𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽𝐽 × 0.7854 × 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 2 − 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟𝑟 2
32. Hydraulic Pressure to Snub (psi):
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸30
𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 = =
𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝐸𝐸𝐸𝐸31
33. Approximate barite requirement for weight-up (100 lb sacks)
15 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖𝑖
𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝐵𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑉𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 ×
35 − 𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾
34. Mud weight from ⁰API
1178.7
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
⁰𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 + 131.5
35. Cutting back MW or Weighting up
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
𝑉𝑉𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎 = 𝑉𝑉𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ×
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 − 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹
36. Final Density of a mix of fluids
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀1 × 𝑉𝑉1 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀2 × 𝑉𝑉2
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹 =
𝑉𝑉1 + 𝑉𝑉2

A172
37. Temperature correction for Brines

𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 = 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑇𝑇 + 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 𝑇𝑇 − 𝑇𝑇𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 × 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊 𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿𝐿 𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹𝐹℉
Brine Weight (ppg) Weight Loss (ppg/F⁰)

8.4 - 9.0 0.0017
9.1 - 11.0 0.0025
11.1 – 14.5 0.0033
14.6 – 17.0 0.0040
17.1 – 19.2 0.0048
Four Choke Panel Marks
1. Initial SICP (ISICP)

2. Choke Opening Position
3. ICP
4. Choke Sweet Spot

A173
Conversion Factors
Multiply By To Get
Length
Feet 0.3048 Meters
Meters 3.2808 Feet
Volume
Gallons (US) 0.003785 Cubic Meters
Barrels (US) 0.15897 Cubic Meters
Cubic Meters 6.2905 Barrels (US)
Cubic Meters 264.2 Gallons (US)
Pressure
Psi 6.895 Kilo Pascals (kPa)
kPa 0.14503 Psi
Kg/cm2 98.1 kPa
Bar 100 kPa
Mud Weight (Density)
ppg 119.8 Kg/m3
ppg 0.12 SG
kg/m3 0.00835 Ppg
Pressure Gradient
Psi/ft 22.62 kPa/m
kPa/m 0.04421 Psi/ft
Temperature
⁰C 1.8 X ⁰C + 32 ⁰F
⁰F 0.556 X ⁰F+255 ⁰K (Kelvin)

A174
Non-Aqueous Fluids (NAF)

Gas Solubility
Gas solubility under bottom hole conditions depends on:

• Specific gravity of gas and nature of the base fluid (higher specific gravity
gases are more soluble in base oil)
• Bottom hole temperature and pressure
• Circulating rate (gas influx rate is fixed: circulating rate affects gas
concentration)
Kick Detection when using NAF (oil base/synthetic base)

 Effects of gas solubility:
o Pit gain at surface may be less than actual influx volume in
OBM/SBM:
o For example, a 10 bbl kick in a WBM may result in a 3 to 8
bbl initial pit gain in an OBM/SBM.
o Gas may be close to surface or above subsea BOP stack before
detection.
o As gas breaks out from solution, sudden reduction of HP would
require adjustments of the choke.
 Maintain accurate PVT/Flo-sho equipment.
 Enforce higher level of vigilance on kick indicators:
o Stop drilling while making mud movements if practical.
o Stop drilling while starting/stopping centrifuges and mud cleaners

if practical.
o Use more stringent alarm settings if practical.
o Consider longer flow checks if practical.

A175
Non-Aqueous Fluids (NAF) - continued

Solubility of Gas in Diesel

At given
Free Gas
Temperature H 2S
CH4
Volume gas soluble per std bbl
CO2
Of diesel oil (MSCF/bbl)
Miscible
Fluid
Soluble Gas
Pressure (psia)
Temp. Pressure Measured BHP may not be calculated

(°F) (psi) Density (ppg) accurately with the mud
78 0 17.000 weight at the surface. It
3000 17.145 requires a PWD tool for
6000 17.275
accurate BHP measurement.
9000 17.389
12,000 17.492
The compressibility can be a
15,000 17.589
200 0 16.392 major component of pressure
3000 16.592 lag time.
6000 16.760
9000 16.905 Recommend measuring lag
12,000 17.033 time during choke drill.
15,000 17.149
350 3000 15.890 This table shows laboratory
16.122
6000 results on a 17 ppg mineral-
9000 16.310
oil based field mud.
12,000 16.469
15,000 16.608
SBM/OBM: Pressure / Temperature Effect on Density

A176
Estimating Bubble Point in NAF

Key Points:
• Solubility increases with pressure and decreases with temperature.
• The solubility of a gas/liquid mixture may be expressed as the volume of free gas
(scf/bbl) that can go into solution at a given condition of pressure and
temperature.
• The bubble point pressure is the pressure at which the first bubble of free gas
breaks out of solution of a given solution gas/liquid ratio at a given temperature.
• Free gas cannot exist in a liquid at pressures in excess of the bubble point.
Example: (all depths RKB)
Water Depth – 3400’

KL CL
Casing Shoe – 7830’ ~ 500 ‘
LOT – 14.0 ppge 9.7 bbl
MW – 11.8 ppg
TVD/TMD – 12510’
Hole Size – 12.25”
Gas sand @ 12500’
Diesel base (60%) OBM
While making a connection at 12,510’,

0.5 bbl of methane gas (SG = 0.65) was
swabbed into the wellbore and goes into
BHT
solution. What is the “bubble point” depth
275⁰ F
(estimated) at which this gas will come
out of solution?
1. Calculate the solubility of methane at bottom-hole conditions in the OBM

using:
𝑐𝑐
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑃𝑃
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 =
𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑎𝑎 × 𝑇𝑇𝑏𝑏
𝑃𝑃 = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
𝑇𝑇 = 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡𝑡 (0 𝐹𝐹) = 2750
𝑎𝑎 = ℎ𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 1.922
𝑏𝑏 = ℎ𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦𝑦 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 0.2552
𝑐𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 = 0.3576 + 1.168 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 + 0.0027 − 0.00492 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 × 𝑇𝑇
− 4.51 × 10−6 − 8.198 × 10−6 × 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 × 𝑇𝑇 2 = 1.0415
1.0415
0.052 × 11.8 × 12510
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆@12510 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = 0.6 × = 760 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
1.922 × 2750.2552

A177
Estimating Bubble Point in NAF - continued

2. Calculate the cf of gas per bbl of mud due to the swab. (For this Example,
assume the 1 bbl influx mixed w/25 bbl of mud in the annulus).
1
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 5.6 × × 𝑉𝑉𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 0.107 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
1 + 25
𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈𝑈 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶, 5.6 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = 1 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
3. Calculate the scf of gas per bbl of mud due to the swab.
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 × 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 × 𝑇𝑇@ 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠 deg 𝐾𝐾 0.107 × 7676 × 288 𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠
𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑠𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = = = 39.4
14.73 × 𝑇𝑇𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜 deg 𝐾𝐾 14.73 × 408 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
°𝐾𝐾 = 0.556 × ℉ + 255
4. Check that all gas from kick is in solution at TD. (Solubility at TD =760 scf/bbl
so all of the swabbed influx is in solution.)
5. Use a spreadsheet display of solubility

vs depth (as shown) and read depth
equivalent to the scf per bbl of
swabbed gas calculated in Step 3. (39.4
scf / bbl for this Example)
Spreadsheet indicates Bubble Point depth to

be around 500 ft.
This means that the swabbed gas (0.5bbl)

will incur no expansion until it “breaks” out
of solution at 500 ft and then suddenly
expand to:
317 × 7676 × 0.5

𝑉𝑉 𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒𝑒 = = 9.7 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
408 × 307
Note:
The Solubility Formula shown
came from:
“Advanced Well Control”
By:
Watson, Brittenham, and Moore

A178
Hydrates
Hydrates are ice like structures formed by water and hydrocarbons at

certain temperatures (as high as 60°F) and pressure conditions.

• Hydrate prevention:
– Add glycol and/or polymers to water phase
– Minimize non-circulating times (temperature drops)―Driller’s
Method
– Use brines
– Use a non-water base fluid (OBM/SBM)
• Hydrate removal:
– Warm the hydrate or remove the pressure
– Lower the freezing point (Pump Methanol)

A179
Fluids and Pit Management

Pit Management During Well Kill Operations

The major factors that will determine the most satisfactory pit arrangement while
displacing a kick include the following:

• The technique that will be used to displace the kick
• The usable surface pit volume in relation to the hole volume
• The method of weighting up the mud
• Handling, storage, and/or disposal of produced fluids displaced to the surface
• Potential magnitude of pit gain caused by influx expansion during
displacement
• Mud treatment required prior to reuse of contaminated returns
• The nature and toxicity of the influx fluid
• Pit level monitoring equipment capabilities
The most satisfactory arrangement of the pits for kill operations may vary
depending on the kill method selected and rig limitations. Pit limitations and
mixing capabilities that may affect the timing of mud weight-up for various
methods are shown below:
In a typical situation, it is impractical to weight up a complete hole

volume prior to displacement of the kick. It will therefore be
necessary for some mud to be weighted while the kick is displaced
from the hole.
The volume that is weighted prior to displacement of the kick will
Wait and Weight depend, for a given hole capacity, on the rate at which barite can be
Method added into the system in relation to the desired rate of
displacement.
In the unusual situation when there is adequate surface volume
(and well behavior permits), a complete hole volume of kill mud
can be prepared before displacement of the kick.
In this case, the mud is weighted either while the kick is displaced
with original mud weight (in a separate pit), or after the first
circulation is completed, depending on the availability of barite and
pit space.
Driller’s Method
Weight-up during the first circulation requires the ability to use the
active system completely independently of the pits in which kill
mud is being prepared. If this ability is lacking, weight-up should be
done only after the influx is circulated out.

A180
Fluids and Pit Management - continued

If these weights are less than the

active system mud weight, it may be
necessary to provide further

treatment to remove possible liquid
influx and/or weight up the mud
before pumping it back into the well.
It is important to have a second
method of dealing with severely gas-
cut returns that exceed the capacity of
the mud/gas separator or that contain
toxic fluids. For offshore, there is
generally a line from the manifold just
downstream of the choke, leading
overboard or to a flare. Onshore, a
similar line should lead to a flare or Standard Mud Balance
burn pit.
It should be easy to switch the returns
from the mud/gas separator to the
flare line. It may be necessary to use
the flare line during a well control
operation in the following situations:
• The gas flow rate is too high for the
mud/gas separator
• Hydrates are forming in the gas
vent line from the mud/gas
separator
The gas is found to contain H2S
•
Pressurized Mud Scale
• The mud system is overloaded (pits
are full or it is desired to discharge
or isolate contaminated returns)
Lines that are required to handle high-
velocity gas should be as straight as
possible to minimize erosion, and
must be properly anchored.

A181
PcMax, VMax, and QMax :Driller’s Method

Maximum casing pressure (Pcmax ) occurs when the gas reaches the surface and can
be calculated along with VMax using the following formulas:
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺 − 𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺𝐺
𝑁𝑁 = & 𝐾𝐾 = 0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 + 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆

2 0.5
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = + + 𝐾𝐾 × 𝑁𝑁 × 𝑉𝑉𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × (4.03 − 0.38 × ln 𝐾𝐾 )
2 2
𝐾𝐾 × 𝑉𝑉𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾𝐾 × (4.03 − 0.38 × ln 𝐾𝐾 )
𝑉𝑉𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 =
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Example:
Gas @ Surface
TD/TVD = 8800 ft
ACF MW=12 ppg
0.0547 psi/bbl
4 ½” 16.6 ppf DP
9 ⅝” 43.50 ppf Csg (0.0744 bbl/ft
SIDPP = 340 psi
MW=12.0 ppg
SICP=600 psi
Circulating Rate (CR) = 30 spm
= 3 bbl/min
Calculate:
Pit Gain = 15 bbl
Pcmax , Vmax & Gas Flow Rate max
Using:
0.624−0.104
𝑁𝑁 = = 9.5 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝/𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 & K=0.052*12.0*8800+340=5831 psi
0.0547
2 0.5
340 340
𝑃𝑃𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 = + + 5831 × 9.5 × 15 × 4.03 − 0.38 ∗ 8.67 = 970 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
2 2
5831 × 15 × 0.74
𝑉𝑉𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 = = 66 𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏
970
What is the peak flow rate (mscf/day) required of the MGS?
𝑉𝑉𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 550 × 𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 × 𝑃𝑃𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 + 0.052 × 𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀
=
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 1000000
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 550 × 3 × 970 + 752
= = 2.84 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚/𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑
𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 1000000

A182
Mud Gas Separator (MGS) Sizing: SPE No. 20430

Gas Vent Line

Mud / Gas Mixture
Mud Gas Cut Mud Inlet
Impingement
Gas Plate
Baffles
Siphon
Breaker
Mud Mud Leg

Return Line
ID
To understand the operating principle of the MGS only requires following the flow
path of the fluids. Mud and gas mix enters the vessel via the mud inlet line where it
flows and impacts an impingement plate. The impingement plate reduces wear
inside the vessel and also causes some gas to “breakout” due to the impact. The
plate also routes the flow downward onto an arrangement of several baffles.
The increased turbulence caused by the baffles further causes gas mud separation.
Gas, due to it’s density, flows upward and exits the gas vent line and the mud flows
to the bottom and exits via the mud return line that discharges the active mud into
the pit system. Where it is usually further processed by a vacuum degasser.
The operating pressure within the separator is equal to the friction pressure of the
gas exiting the vent line. Fluid level is maintained by the hydrostatic of the mud
leg. If the vent line friction pressure exceeds the mud leg hydrostatic, gas will blow
through to the mud pit system.
There are many important variables that go into the design of a mud gas separator.
Most separators being manufactured today are designed to work effectively,
however it is still a good idea to check on capacity limits.

A183
Mud Gas Separator (MGS) - continued

Separators include horizontal and vertical models but most separators used in the
drilling industry are vertical, and that is what’s described here.
The important issue when sizing a MGS is to ensure there is minimal chance for gas
“blow through” to the mud pit system. The two cases where this may occur is:
1. The mud return line friction pressure and hydrostatic “mud leg” should be
greater than the gas vent line friction pressure when the MGS is operating
fully.
2. Insufficient vessel ID could reduce the retention time in the separator thus
reducing the gas separation from the mud. The exiting mud would then
contain an undesirable gas volume as it discharges to the mud pits.
Working through an example will illustrate these issues and allow for a better
understanding.
Example Data:
Well kick occurred and the shut-in conditions indicate that the 15 bbl kick
could yield 66 bbl of gas with a Pcmax value of 970 psi when circulated to the
surface using the Driller’s Method. This would require the MGS be capable of
handling 2.65 mscf/day peak flow rate. The OMW is 12.0 ppg and the
planned Circulating Rate (CR) is 3 bbl/min.
Sizing Procedure
1. Estimate the vent line friction pressure when the MGS is exposed to the peak
gas flow rate Qmax (mscf per day). Assuming an empirical friction factor for that
of a smooth, straight, steel pipe and a gas density of 0.01 ppg permits using
the following formula:
Where:
Le= Total vent line length plus equivalent lengths for bend, etc. (For this
example: vent line consists of 200 ft of 7” ID pipe with 2 sharp right bends)
Ds=Vent line ID (7” for this example)
Qmax= mscf per day of gas flow
5.0 × 𝐿𝐿𝑒𝑒 × 𝑄𝑄𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 2
𝑃𝑃𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 =
𝐷𝐷𝑠𝑠 5
2
5.0 × (200 + 70 + 70) × 2.65𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚
𝑃𝑃𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 = = 0.71 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝
7.05
(Note: Effective vent line lengths will be greatly effected by the installation of
flame arresters or auto-igniters.)

A184
Mud Gas Separator (MGS) - continued

2. Check that the mud leg hydrostatic is greater than the vent line friction
pressure. The worst case of HP in the mud leg would be if full of oil. (For
this example an oil of 0.26 psi/ft gradient is used).

𝑃𝑃𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣𝑣 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 0.71
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚𝑚 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = = = 2.7 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔𝑔 0.26
3. Check for sufficient separator ID for the planned kill circulation rate. (Here
the CR=3 bpm.
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼 = 15.72 × √𝐶𝐶𝐶𝐶 = 15.72 × 1.73 = 27"
Equivalent Equivalent
Source Sketch Length Source Sketch Length
Bend Bend
Acute Obtuse
3 15
Round Sharp
Bend
Acute Contraction
150 1
Sharp Gradual
Bend
Right Contraction
1 10
Round Abrupt
Bend
Right Expansion
70 1
Sharp Gradual
Bend
Obtuse Expansion
1 20
Round Abrupt
Table of Bend/Corner Equivalent Lengths

A185
Steam Operations
Steam Behavior: Temperature and Pressure Relationships

Water boils at 212⁰F when at atmospheric pressure (14.7 psi

absolute). The boiling water is changed from a liquid state to
gaseous steam vapor. But if water is under a pressure greater than
atmospheric, the boiling (vapor) temperature is greatly increased.
But if the pressure is rapidly reduced, the water state explosively
flashes to a vaporous (steam) state .
14.7 psi
80 °F
Valve
16501650
gal of
1 Gallon
Of Water
gallons
steam of
steam!
250 psi
400 °F
1 Gallon
Of Water
If the containing valve is quickly

Water will not boil at 212 deg. F
opened, one gallon of water will
when contained with 250 psi
explode to 1650 gal of steam.

A186
Steam Operations - continued

Basic Concepts at Issue

High bottom-hole temperature at shallow depths
 Rapid transport of fluids from shallow depths

 Potential for exposure to hot fluids at surface (hot mud/steam)
Water-based muds or brines may be exposed to high temperatures

 May flash at wellbore temperature-pressure conditions
 Potential BLEVE (Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapor Explosion)
A BLEVE can occur with no notice and very rapidly
explosively unload the well and blow-out to the surface.
Circulating Stop Circulating

80⁰F
150⁰F
Potential
BLEVE
200⁰F 400+⁰F
410⁰F 410⁰F
HP=250 psi @ 500’
FP=220 psi @ 500’
Once circulation is stopped, the mud will begin to heat up to

400+⁰F. Bottom hole Temperature and hydrostatic pressure
remains constant. If left unchecked, could rapidly result in a
BLEVE event!

A187
Steam Operations - continued

Preventing a BLEVE
In Steam Flood Operations, it is important to determine (during planning

operations) whether or not conditions for a BLEVE do or could exist.
1. Collect information about proposed or potential wellbore (formation)
temperatures.
2. Use a “Steam Table” to determine whether or not proposed or
acceptable fluid densities will provide enough hydrostatic pressure to
prevent boiling at any point in the wellbore.
3. If conditions for a BLEVE exist, plan the operation to ensure temperature
control as well as pressure control. Periodically introduce cooler fluids
from the surface.
Shut-in Considerations
– Is there time to stab a fully opened safety valve?
– Is there a float valve and circulating sub installed in the DP / tubing?
– Have “pipe light” issues/risks been considered/mitigated?
– Is there a shear/blind ram in the BOP?
– Is it possible to divert flow to the disposal pit, possibly by use of a pre-
installed rotating head?
Killing Wells in Steam Flood Operations
If possible to control the well with fluid hydrostatic alone:
– Kill the well normally using the Driller’s Method, but monitor return fluid
temperature to identify unexpectedly high wellbore temperature.
If BLEVE conditions may exist:
– Pump kill weight fluid, but consider/monitor the wellbore temperature to
prevent additional steam evolution (boiling).
– Local SOPs may specify fluid and pumping options (mud circulation vs.
cooling vs. bullheading).

A188
Predicting BLEVE Conditions

Steam Table
A Steam Table can be used to predict the state of water relative to
temperature and pressure changes.
Example
Formation pressure 13.0 ppge
Highest potential wellbore temperature 400⁰F
Shallowest depth potentially exposed to high temperature 400 ft
Fracture pressure EMW below shoe @ 300 ft 15.0 ppg
(2) To 13.0 ppg

(3) 350 ft
(1) 400⁰F to Vapor Liquid Line
1. From steam table, Pressure to control steam @ 400⁰F = 250 psi

2. Minimum depth (height) of 13 ppg fluid to provide 250 psi absolute = 350 ft
3. Since there will be a minimum of 400 ft of 13 ppg mud in the hole at the
shallowest depth exposed to 400⁰F, this well does not present risk of a BLEVE.
OR; use the Formula Below:

𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝑃𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴𝐴 − 14.7 250 − 14.7
𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷𝐷 = = = 348 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.052 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀 0.052 × 13

A189
Pipe Light / Heavy Conditions

SICP = 320 psi

Example:
Well flowed while POOH and was
93’ of 9”OD shut –in with 320 psi on casing.
x 3” ID There is a stand of 9” DC hanging
192#/ft DC in the elevators. Is the pipe heavy
or light?
MW – 10.9 ppg
1. Calculate the buoyed weight of the string.

𝐼𝐼𝐼𝐼2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑀𝑀𝑀𝑀ℎ𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜𝑜
𝑊𝑊 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 𝑊𝑊 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 + −
( )𝑏𝑏
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
( )𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎𝑎
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 24.5 24.5
32 × 10.9 92 × 10.9 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
𝑊𝑊 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙 = 192 + − = 192 + 4 − 36 = 152
( )𝑏𝑏
𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 24.5 24.5 𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆 𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏𝑏 = 93 × 152 = 14,136 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
2. Calculate the upward force of the pipe due to the shut-in pressure.
𝐹𝐹𝑝𝑝 = 0.7854 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂2 × 𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆𝑆
𝐹𝐹𝑝𝑝 = 0.7854 × 92 × 320 = 20,358 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
3. Calculate the net downward force(weight) on the pipe.
𝑊𝑊𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = 𝑊𝑊𝑏𝑏 − 𝐹𝐹𝑝𝑝 = 14,136 − 20,358 = −6,222 𝑙𝑙𝑙𝑙
4. Since the upward force due to the shut-in pressure is greater than the
buoyed weight of the collars, the pipe is in a pipe “light” condition and is
likely to be ejected from the well.
Note:
This example illustrates why it is a good practice to stop the
trip out and conduct a flow-check prior to pulling the BHA
across the BOP.

A190
Broken U-Tube
Types of Broken U-Tube

Drill pipe and annulus are not in hydraulic communication due to plugged BHA,
bridging, etc.. And circulation cannot be initiated.
Loss of wellbore integrity...fracture gradient will not support surface pressures
needed for well control circulation methods....with potential for “Underground
Blowout”
Recognizing Loss of Wellbore Integrity

• Excessive fluid losses while attempting
• Recognize “Broken U-tubes” and potential
underground blowouts.
• Describe Plans of Action (POA) for “Broken U-
tubes” and potential underground blowout
situations.
• Recognize the well control effects of weak casing
shoes in deepwater
• Underground blowout situations in deepwater
operations,
• Gas lubrication with wellbore fluid losses
• Slimhole well control considerations.
Possible Plan of Action (POA)

• High level steps:
o Implement processes for observation of surface sheens and
mudline seepage
o Put oil containment equipment on standby
o Set in motion shipment of wellbore logging equipment
required to determine loss zones
o Implement contingency plan to restore wellbore integrity,
i.e. pumping LCM, gunk squeeze, dewatering pill, cement,
barite pills, etc.
o Implement non conventional kill methods
• Contingency plans to restore wellbore integrity
o Pump conventional loss circulation material (LCM) to
attempt to regain well control circulation

A191
Broken U-Tube
Possible Plan of Action (POA) - continued

o Pump barite pill, gunk squeeze, dewatering pill or cement

plug...to bridge and isolate the producing zone from the
loss zone
• Non conventional kill methods:
o Bullhead kill fluid to the loss and/or producing zones
o Bottom Kill … pump weighted slug below the loss zone to
overbalance the producing zone
o Sandwich Kill …. bullhead kill fluid from both above and
below the loss zone
o Dynamic Kill … pump kill fluids in stages at high rates
increasing fluid weight until well is killed … use modeling
software to design the kill process

A192

App A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

App A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

This course material, and the content provided herein, is intended exclusively for internal Chevron use by internal

course participants and is not to be shared outside the Company.

Chevron Well Control Handbook

“Always comply with all applicable rules and

Well Control Goals

based on principles that guarantee containment.

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 -7 2

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 -8 3

D&C GTS Well Control Requirements (excerpts)

Blowout Contingency Plan

Emergency Evacuation Procedures

Drill String Float

Minimum Fluid Inventories

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 -9 4

D&C GTS Well Control Requirements (excerpts)

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 5

D&C GTS Well Control Requirements (excerpts)

6. A Chevron drill/wellsite manager (DSM/WSM), with a valid Chevron Well

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 6

Barriers (D&C Global Technical Standard: Well Barrier Design)

In a well design, a barrier is a component or practice that contributes to total

The three classifications of barriers are:

Hydrostatic Barrier Examples:

A static test is the primary means of Hydrostatic Barrier Verification. It is used

Cement Barrier Verification

• Verification of placement (inside the wellbore or casing annulus) is also

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 7

Mechanical Barrier Examples:

• Full opening safety valve (FOSV), top drive FOSV, IBOP

Barrier integrity shall be verified upon installation and at periodic intervals, as

APPLICATION OF THE BARRIER STANDARD

Long-term Suspension & Abandonment

If one of the required minimum barriers fails, forward operations

Prior to commencing operations, a well diagram or table shall be

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 13

Training & Competency

All rig personnel having well control duties must be competent in

their ability to perform those duties. To ensure competency Chevron

Well Control Training

Participation in Well Control Drills

Drills (D&C GTS: Well Control Requirements) Frequency (per crew)

Non-Shearable Drill Prior to event

Drill for Non-Routine Operations Once per operation

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook 1 14

Well Control Responsibilities

The following Contractor and Service Company personnel

assignments and responsibilities should be available and posted

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 10

Well Control Responsibilities - continued

• Stands-by in the control room or bridge in preparation for responding to an

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 11

Basic Concepts: Wellbore Pressures

MW To calculate the total vertical depth (TVD):

𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻 = 0.052 × 10.8 × 8596 = 4828 𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝𝑝

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 12

Drill String Annulus

IMPORTANT RELATIONSHIPS (Static Wellbore)

1. 𝐻𝐻𝐻𝐻𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑𝑑 = 0.052 × 𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇𝑇 × 𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂𝑂

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 13

Circulating System Friction Pressure

Standpipe pressure is the sum of the “friction”

fluid through the circulation path.

Version 1.3 Chevron Well Control Handbook - 14